merge from gcc
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
a2b64bed 3@c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
8a308ae8
NC
4@c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009
5@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 6@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 7@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
8@include configdoc.texi
9@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 10@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 11@c man end
252b5132
RH
12
13@c @smallbook
14
ff5dcc92
SC
15@macro gcctabopt{body}
16@code{\body\}
17@end macro
18
0285c67d
NC
19@c man begin NAME
20@ifset man
21@c Configure for the generation of man pages
22@set UsesEnvVars
23@set GENERIC
0285c67d 24@set ARM
49fa1e15 25@set H8300
0285c67d 26@set HPPA
0285c67d 27@set I960
0285c67d 28@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 29@set M68K
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
32@set POWERPC
33@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
34@set Renesas
35@set SPU
36@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 37@set WIN32
e0001a05 38@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
39@end ifset
40@c man end
41
252b5132
RH
42@ifinfo
43@format
44START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
45* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
46END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
47@end format
48@end ifinfo
49
0e9517a9 50@copying
e49e529d
JM
51This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
52@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
53@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
54@end ifset
55version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 56
0e9517a9 57Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000,
8a308ae8 582001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
9c8ebd6a 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001,
903249d7 962002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 97
0285c67d 98Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 99under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
100or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 103section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 104@c man end
252b5132 105
252b5132
RH
106@end titlepage
107@end iftex
4ecceb71 108@contents
252b5132
RH
109@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
84ec0e6d 111@ifnottex
252b5132 112@node Top
71ba23f6 113@top LD
e49e529d
JM
114This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117@end ifset
118version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 119
cf055d54 120This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
121Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 123
252b5132
RH
124@menu
125* Overview:: Overview
126* Invocation:: Invocation
127* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128@ifset GENERIC
129* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130@end ifset
131@ifclear GENERIC
132@ifset H8300
133* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
135@ifset Renesas
136* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
137@end ifset
138@ifset I960
139* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
140@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
141@ifset ARM
142* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
143@end ifset
144@ifset HPPA
145* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
147@ifset M68HC11
148* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
149@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
150@ifset M68K
151* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
152@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
153@ifset POWERPC
154* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155@end ifset
156@ifset POWERPC64
157* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
159@ifset SPU
160* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
161@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
162@ifset TICOFF
163* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
164@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
165@ifset WIN32
166* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
167@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
168@ifset XTENSA
169* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
170@end ifset
252b5132
RH
171@end ifclear
172@ifclear SingleFormat
173* BFD:: BFD
174@end ifclear
175@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
176
177* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
178* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 179* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 180* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 181@end menu
84ec0e6d 182@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
183
184@node Overview
185@chapter Overview
186
187@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
188@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 189
0879a67a 190@ifset man
0285c67d 191@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 192ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
193@c man end
194
195@c man begin SEEALSO
196ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
197the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
198@file{ld}.
199@c man end
200@end ifset
201
202@c man begin DESCRIPTION
203
ff5dcc92 204@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 205their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 206compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 207
ff5dcc92 208@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
209a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
210to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
211
0285c67d
NC
212@ifset man
213@c For the man only
ece2d90e 214This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
215@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
216language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
217@end ifset
218
252b5132 219@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
220This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
221to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
222write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
223@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
224available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
225@end ifclear
226
227Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
228linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
229execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 230@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
231(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
232
0285c67d
NC
233@c man end
234
252b5132
RH
235@node Invocation
236@chapter Invocation
237
0285c67d
NC
238@c man begin DESCRIPTION
239
ff5dcc92 240The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
241and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
242you have many choices to control its behavior.
243
0285c67d
NC
244@c man end
245
252b5132
RH
246@ifset UsesEnvVars
247@menu
248* Options:: Command Line Options
249* Environment:: Environment Variables
250@end menu
251
252@node Options
253@section Command Line Options
254@end ifset
255
256@cindex command line
257@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
258
259@c man begin OPTIONS
260
252b5132
RH
261The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
262practice few of them are used in any particular context.
263@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 264For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
265object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
266link a file @code{hello.o}:
267
268@smallexample
269ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
270@end smallexample
271
ff5dcc92 272This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
273result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
274the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
275directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
276
ff5dcc92 277Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
278point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
279as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
280which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
281files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
282different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
283occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
284option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
285noted in the descriptions below.
286
287@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
288Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
289together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
290options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
291an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
292
293Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
294specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
295and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
296are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
297message @samp{No input files}.
298
36f63dca 299If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
300assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
301augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
302linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
303permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
304or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
305@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
306script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
307extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
308to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
309the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
310
311For options whose names are a single letter,
312option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
313whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
314option that requires them.
315
316For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 317precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 318@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 319this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 320only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
321@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
322name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
323output.
324
325Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
326option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
327immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
328@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
329Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
330accepted.
252b5132 331
36f63dca
NC
332Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
333(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
334prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
335compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
336
337@smallexample
2509a395 338 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
339@end smallexample
340
341This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
342silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
343may also arise when passing options that require values through a
344driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
345a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
346and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
347the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
348
349@smallexample
350 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
351@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
352
353Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
354linker:
355
ff5dcc92 356@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 357@include at-file.texi
dff70155 358
2509a395
SL
359@kindex -a @var{keyword}
360@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
361This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
362argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
363@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
364@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
365to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
366
367@ifset I960
368@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
369@kindex -A @var{arch}
370@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
371@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
372@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
373In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
374Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
375@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
376the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 377archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
378family}, for details.
379
ff5dcc92 380Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
381other architecture families.
382@end ifset
383
384@ifclear SingleFormat
385@cindex binary input format
386@kindex -b @var{format}
387@kindex --format=@var{format}
388@cindex input format
389@cindex input format
390@item -b @var{input-format}
391@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
392@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
393file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 394@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 395that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 396configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 397to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
398default input format the most usual format on each machine.
399@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
400supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
401formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
402@xref{BFD}.
403
404You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
405binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
406linking object files of different formats), by including
407@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 408particular format.
252b5132
RH
409
410The default format is taken from the environment variable
411@code{GNUTARGET}.
412@ifset UsesEnvVars
413@xref{Environment}.
414@end ifset
415You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
416@code{TARGET};
417@ifclear man
418see @ref{Format Commands}.
419@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
420@end ifclear
421
422@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
423@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
424@cindex compatibility, MRI
425@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
426@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 427For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 428files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
429@ifclear man
430@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
431@end ifclear
432@ifset man
433the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
434@end ifset
435Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 436the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
437scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
438If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
439specified by any @samp{-L} options.
440
441@cindex common allocation
442@kindex -d
443@kindex -dc
444@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 445@item -d
252b5132
RH
446@itemx -dc
447@itemx -dp
448These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
449compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
450even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
451script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
452@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
453
454@cindex entry point, from command line
455@kindex -e @var{entry}
456@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 457@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
458@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
459Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
460program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
461named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
462and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
463base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
464@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
465and other ways of specifying the entry point.
466
b58f81ae
DJ
467@kindex --exclude-libs
468@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
469Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 470exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
471@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
472automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
473port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
474explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
475option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
476be treated as hidden.
477
e1c37eb5
DK
478@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
479@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
480Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
481should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
482into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
483may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
484used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
485the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
486match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
487command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
488of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
489regardless of this option.
490
252b5132
RH
491@cindex dynamic symbol table
492@kindex -E
493@kindex --export-dynamic
494@item -E
495@itemx --export-dynamic
496When creating a dynamically linked executable, add all symbols to the
497dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the set of symbols
498which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
499
500If you do not use this option, the dynamic symbol table will normally
501contain only those symbols which are referenced by some dynamic object
502mentioned in the link.
503
504If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
505back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
506dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
507linking the program itself.
508
55255dae 509You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 510be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 511See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 512
8b747e1a
DK
513Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
514support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
515the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
516
36f63dca 517@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
518@cindex big-endian objects
519@cindex endianness
520@kindex -EB
521@item -EB
522Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
523
524@cindex little-endian objects
525@kindex -EL
526@item -EL
527Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 528@end ifclear
252b5132 529
2509a395
SL
530@kindex -f @var{name}
531@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
532@item -f @var{name}
533@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
534When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
535to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
536table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
537symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
538
539If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
540run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
541the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
542first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
543@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
544in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
545Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
546implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
547machine specific performance.
548
549This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
550will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
551
2509a395
SL
552@kindex -F @var{name}
553@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 554@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 555@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
556When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
557the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
558of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
559on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
560
561If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
562run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
563dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
564filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
565found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
566used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
567@var{name}.
568
ff5dcc92 569Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 570toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
571object files.
572@ifclear SingleFormat
573The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 574@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 575@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
576environment variable.
577@end ifclear
578The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
579creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 580
3dbf70a2 581@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
582@kindex -fini=@var{name}
583@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
584When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
585executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
586address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
587the function to call.
588
252b5132
RH
589@kindex -g
590@item -g
591Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
592
2509a395
SL
593@kindex -G @var{value}
594@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 595@cindex object size
2509a395 596@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
597@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
598Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
599@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
600MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
601sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
602
603@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 604@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 605@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 606@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
607@itemx -soname=@var{name}
608When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
609the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
610which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
611linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
612field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
613
614@kindex -i
615@cindex incremental link
616@item -i
617Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
618
3dbf70a2 619@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
620@kindex -init=@var{name}
621@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
622When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
623executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
624of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
625function to call.
626
252b5132 627@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 628@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 629@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 630@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
631@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
632Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
633list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
634If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
635will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherise it
636will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 637
ff5dcc92 638On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
639files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
640and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
641called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
642@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
643indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
644to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
645@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
646
647The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
648specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
649was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
650command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
651archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
652the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
653
ff5dcc92 654See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
655archives multiple times.
656
657You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
658
659@ifset GENERIC
660This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 661if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
662behaviour of the AIX linker.
663@end ifset
664
665@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 666@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 667@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 668@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 669@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
670Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
671for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
672option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
673in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
674on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 675@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
676order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
677how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
678option is specified.
252b5132 679
9c8ebd6a
DJ
680If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
681by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
682
252b5132
RH
683@ifset UsesEnvVars
684The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 685@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
686some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
687@end ifset
688
689The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
690@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
691at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
692
693@cindex emulation
694@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 695@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
696Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
697emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
698
699If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
700@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
701
702Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
703configured.
704
705@cindex link map
706@kindex -M
707@kindex --print-map
708@item -M
709@itemx --print-map
710Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
711information about the link, including the following:
712
713@itemize @bullet
714@item
3b83e13a 715Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
716@item
717How common symbols are allocated.
718@item
719All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
720which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
721@item
722The values assigned to symbols.
723
724Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
725involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
726have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
727linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
728of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
729the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
730linker script containing:
731
732@smallexample
733 foo = 1
734 foo = foo * 4
735 foo = foo + 8
736@end smallexample
737
738will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
739option is used:
740
741@smallexample
742 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
743 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
744 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
745@end smallexample
746
747See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
748scripts.
252b5132
RH
749@end itemize
750
751@kindex -n
752@cindex read-only text
753@cindex NMAGIC
754@kindex --nmagic
755@item -n
756@itemx --nmagic
fa19fce0 757Turn off page alignment of sections, and mark the output as
a1ab1d2a 758@code{NMAGIC} if possible.
252b5132
RH
759
760@kindex -N
761@kindex --omagic
762@cindex read/write from cmd line
763@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 764@item -N
252b5132
RH
765@itemx --omagic
766Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
767not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
768libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
769mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
770is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
771specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
772
773@kindex --no-omagic
774@cindex OMAGIC
775@item --no-omagic
776This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
777sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
778be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
779shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
780
781@kindex -o @var{output}
782@kindex --output=@var{output}
783@cindex naming the output file
784@item -o @var{output}
785@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 786Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
787option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
788script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
789
790@kindex -O @var{level}
791@cindex generating optimized output
792@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 793If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 794the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
795should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
796option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
797the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
798no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
799of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 800
a712da20
NC
801@kindex -q
802@kindex --emit-relocs
803@cindex retain relocations in final executable
804@item -q
805@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 806Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
807Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
808order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
809in larger executables.
810
dbab7a7b
NC
811This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
812
4f471f39
RS
813@kindex --force-dynamic
814@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
815@item --force-dynamic
816Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
817to VxWorks targets.
818
252b5132
RH
819@cindex partial link
820@cindex relocatable output
821@kindex -r
1049f94e 822@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 823@item -r
1049f94e 824@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 825Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 826turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
827linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
828magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
829@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 830@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
831If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
832linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
833constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
834
62bf86b4
HPN
835When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
836partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
837relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
838example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
839with input files in other formats at all.
840
252b5132
RH
841This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
842
843@kindex -R @var{file}
844@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
845@cindex symbol-only input
846@item -R @var{filename}
847@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
848Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
849relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
850to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
851programs. You may use this option more than once.
852
ff5dcc92 853For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 854followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 855the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
856
857@kindex -s
858@kindex --strip-all
859@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 860@item -s
252b5132
RH
861@itemx --strip-all
862Omit all symbol information from the output file.
863
864@kindex -S
865@kindex --strip-debug
866@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 867@item -S
252b5132
RH
868@itemx --strip-debug
869Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
870
871@kindex -t
872@kindex --trace
873@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 874@item -t
252b5132 875@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 876Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
877
878@kindex -T @var{script}
879@kindex --script=@var{script}
880@cindex script files
881@item -T @var{scriptfile}
882@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
883Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 884@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 885@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
886output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
887the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
888specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
889options accumulate.
252b5132 890
14be8564
L
891@kindex -dT @var{script}
892@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
893@cindex script files
894@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
895@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
896Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
897
898This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
899processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
900command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
901@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
902behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
903command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
904the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
905@samp{gcc}).
906
252b5132
RH
907@kindex -u @var{symbol}
908@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
909@cindex undefined symbol
910@item -u @var{symbol}
911@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
912Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
913symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
914modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
915different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
916option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
917
918@kindex -Ur
919@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 920@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
921For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
922@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 923turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
924@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
925It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
926with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
927be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
928@samp{-r} for the others.
929
577a0623
AM
930@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
931@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
932Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
933@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
934missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
935specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
936multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
937input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
938in a linker script.
a854a4a7 939
252b5132
RH
940@kindex -v
941@kindex -V
942@kindex --version
943@cindex version
944@item -v
945@itemx --version
946@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 947Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
948lists the supported emulations.
949
950@kindex -x
951@kindex --discard-all
952@cindex deleting local symbols
953@item -x
954@itemx --discard-all
955Delete all local symbols.
956
957@kindex -X
958@kindex --discard-locals
959@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 960@item -X
252b5132 961@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
962Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
963system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
964or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
965
966@kindex -y @var{symbol}
967@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
968@cindex symbol tracing
969@item -y @var{symbol}
970@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
971Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
972option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
973to prepend an underscore.
974
975This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
976don't know where the reference is coming from.
977
978@kindex -Y @var{path}
979@item -Y @var{path}
980Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
981for Solaris compatibility.
982
983@kindex -z @var{keyword}
984@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
985The recognized keywords are:
986@table @samp
987
988@item combreloc
989Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
990lookup caching possible.
991
992@item defs
560e09e9 993Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 994shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 995
6aa29e7b
JJ
996@item execstack
997Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
998
cd6d6c15
NC
999@item initfirst
1000This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1001It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1002before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1003the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1004the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1005objects.
1006
1007@item interpose
1008Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1009but the primary executable.
1010
5fa222e4
AM
1011@item lazy
1012When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1013dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1014the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1015Lazy binding is the default.
1016
cd6d6c15
NC
1017@item loadfltr
1018Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1019runtime.
1020
1021@item muldefs
1022Allows multiple definitions.
1023
1024@item nocombreloc
1025Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1026
1027@item nocopyreloc
1028Disables production of copy relocs.
1029
1030@item nodefaultlib
1031Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1032ignore any default library search paths.
1033
1034@item nodelete
1035Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1036
1037@item nodlopen
1038Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1039
1040@item nodump
1041Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1042
6aa29e7b
JJ
1043@item noexecstack
1044Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1045
1046@item norelro
1047Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1048
cd6d6c15
NC
1049@item now
1050When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1051dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1052when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1053deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1054first called.
1055
1056@item origin
1057Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1058
6aa29e7b
JJ
1059@item relro
1060Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1061
24718e3b
L
1062@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1063Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1064
1065@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1066Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1067
cd6d6c15
NC
1068@end table
1069
ece2d90e 1070Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1071
1072@kindex -(
1073@cindex groups of archives
1074@item -( @var{archives} -)
1075@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1076The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1077either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1078
1079The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1080references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1081the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1082archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1083object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1084would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1085they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1086resolved.
1087
1088Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1089it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1090more archives.
1091
69da35b5
NC
1092@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1093@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1094@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1095@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1096Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1097recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1098and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1099the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1100behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1101so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1102restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1103
4a43e768
AM
1104@kindex --as-needed
1105@kindex --no-as-needed
1106@item --as-needed
1107@itemx --no-as-needed
1108This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1109on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally,
1110the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1111on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
010e5ae2
AM
1112needed. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be emitted
1113for a library that satisfies a symbol reference from regular objects
1114which is undefined at the point that the library was linked, or, if
1115the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries
1116linked up to that point, a reference from another dynamic library.
4a43e768
AM
1117@option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1118
e56f61be
L
1119@kindex --add-needed
1120@kindex --no-add-needed
1121@item --add-needed
1122@itemx --no-add-needed
1123This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries from ELF
1124DT_NEEDED tags in dynamic libraries mentioned on the command line after
1125the @option{--no-add-needed} option. Normally, the linker will add
1126a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library from DT_NEEDED tags.
1127@option{--no-add-needed} causes DT_NEEDED tags will never be emitted
1128for those libraries from DT_NEEDED tags. @option{--add-needed} restores
1129the default behaviour.
1130
252b5132
RH
1131@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1132@item -assert @var{keyword}
1133This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1134
1135@kindex -Bdynamic
1136@kindex -dy
1137@kindex -call_shared
1138@item -Bdynamic
1139@itemx -dy
1140@itemx -call_shared
1141Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1142for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1143default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1144for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1145multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1146@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1147
a1ab1d2a
UD
1148@kindex -Bgroup
1149@item -Bgroup
1150Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1151section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1152object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1153@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1154only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1155
252b5132
RH
1156@kindex -Bstatic
1157@kindex -dn
1158@kindex -non_shared
1159@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1160@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1161@itemx -dn
1162@itemx -non_shared
1163@itemx -static
1164Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1165platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1166variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1167may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1168library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1169option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1170option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1171shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1172references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1173libraries.
252b5132
RH
1174
1175@kindex -Bsymbolic
1176@item -Bsymbolic
1177When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1178definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1179for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1180within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1181platforms which support shared libraries.
1182
40b36307
L
1183@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1184@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1185When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1186symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1187This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1188libraries.
1189
55255dae
L
1190@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1191@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1192Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1193typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1194global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1195within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1196to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1197in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1198which support shared libraries.
1199
1200The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1201scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1202
40b36307
L
1203@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1204@item --dynamic-list-data
1205Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1206
1207@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1208@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1209Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1210is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1211
0b8a70d9
L
1212@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1213@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1214Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1215
252b5132
RH
1216@kindex --check-sections
1217@kindex --no-check-sections
1218@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1219@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1220Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1221been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1222perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1223suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1224allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1225restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1226Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1227force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1228option.
252b5132
RH
1229
1230@cindex cross reference table
1231@kindex --cref
1232@item --cref
1233Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1234generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1235Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1236
1237The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1238easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1239sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1240symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1241definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1242
4818e05f
AM
1243@cindex common allocation
1244@kindex --no-define-common
1245@item --no-define-common
1246This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1247The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1248@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1249
1250The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1251the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1252of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1253forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1254Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1255from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1256This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1257and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1258duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1259paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1260
252b5132 1261@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1262@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1263@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1264Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1265address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1266times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1267limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1268context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1269symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1270constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1271using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1272Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1273space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1274@var{expression}.
1275
1276@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1277@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1278@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1279@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1280@itemx --no-demangle
1281These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1282and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1283present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1284underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1285mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1286different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1287to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1288demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1289is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1290
1291@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1292@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1293@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1294@item -I@var{file}
1295@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1296Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1297generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1298linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1299doing.
1300
7ce691ae 1301@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1302@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1303@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1304@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1305Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1306with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1307
252b5132
RH
1308@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1309@item --force-exe-suffix
1310Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1311
1312If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1313@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1314the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1315option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1316Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1317it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1318
1319@kindex --gc-sections
1320@kindex --no-gc-sections
1321@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1322@item --gc-sections
1323@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1324Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1325targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1326performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1327@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1328
d5465ba2
AM
1329@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1330examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1331symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1332command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1333referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1334libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1335referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1336the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1337relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1338
ac69cbc6
TG
1339This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1340@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitely
1341specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1342a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1343
c17d87de
NC
1344@kindex --print-gc-sections
1345@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1346@cindex garbage collection
1347@item --print-gc-sections
1348@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1349List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1350printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1351collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1352default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1353be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1354line.
1355
252b5132
RH
1356@cindex help
1357@cindex usage
1358@kindex --help
1359@item --help
1360Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1361
ea20a7da
CC
1362@kindex --target-help
1363@item --target-help
1364Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1365
2509a395
SL
1366@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1367@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1368Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1369@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1370
1371@cindex memory usage
1372@kindex --no-keep-memory
1373@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1374@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1375symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1376instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1377necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1378while linking a large executable.
1379
1380@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1381@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1382@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1383@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1384Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1385is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1386The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1387behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1388libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1389
aa713662
L
1390@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1391@kindex -z muldefs
1392@item --allow-multiple-definition
1393@itemx -z muldefs
1394Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1395report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1396first definition will be used.
1397
b79e8c78 1398@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1399@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1400@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1401@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1402Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1403This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1404determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1405shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1406how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1407
903249d7
NC
1408The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1409referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1410an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1411a shared library.
1412
1413The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1414libraries specified at link time are that:
1415
1416@itemize @bullet
1417@item
1418A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1419that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1420resolvable at load time.
1421@item
1422There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1423symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1424
1425The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1426select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1427architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1428appropriate memset function.
1429@end itemize
b79e8c78 1430
31941635
L
1431@kindex --no-undefined-version
1432@item --no-undefined-version
1433Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1434it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1435will be issued instead.
1436
3e3b46e5
PB
1437@kindex --default-symver
1438@item --default-symver
1439Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1440exported symbols.
1441
1442@kindex --default-imported-symver
1443@item --default-imported-symver
1444Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1445imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1446
252b5132
RH
1447@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1448@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1449Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1450files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1451been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1452This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1453errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1454have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1455inappropriate.
1456
fe7929ce
AM
1457@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1458@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1459Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1460library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1461
252b5132
RH
1462@kindex --no-whole-archive
1463@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1464Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1465archive files.
1466
1467@cindex output file after errors
1468@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1469@item --noinhibit-exec
1470Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1471Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1472errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1473when it issues any error whatsoever.
1474
0a9c1c8e
CD
1475@kindex -nostdlib
1476@item -nostdlib
1477Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1478command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1479(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1480
252b5132 1481@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1482@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1483@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1484@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1485file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1486@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1487object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1488object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1489should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1490usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1491name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1492list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1493command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1494this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1495@end ifclear
1496
36af4a4e
JJ
1497@kindex -pie
1498@kindex --pic-executable
1499@item -pie
1500@itemx --pic-executable
1501@cindex position independent executables
1502Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1503ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1504libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1505address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1506normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1507defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1508
252b5132
RH
1509@kindex -qmagic
1510@item -qmagic
1511This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1512
1513@kindex -Qy
1514@item -Qy
1515This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1516
1517@kindex --relax
1518@cindex synthesizing linker
1519@cindex relaxing addressing modes
1520@item --relax
a1ab1d2a 1521An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1522@ifset GENERIC
1523This option is only supported on a few targets.
1524@end ifset
1525@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1526@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1527@end ifset
1528@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1529@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1530@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1531@ifset XTENSA
1532@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1533@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1534@ifset M68HC11
1535@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1536@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1537@ifset POWERPC
1538@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1539@end ifset
252b5132
RH
1540
1541On some platforms, the @samp{--relax} option performs global
1542optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves addressing
1543in the program, such as relaxing address modes and synthesizing new
1544instructions in the output object file.
1545
1546On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1547debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1548@ifset GENERIC
1549This is known to be
1550the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300 family of processors.
1551@end ifset
1552
1553@ifset GENERIC
1554On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1555but ignored.
1556@end ifset
1557
1558@cindex retaining specified symbols
1559@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1560@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1561@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1562@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1563Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1564discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1565symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1566@ifset GENERIC
1567(such as VxWorks)
1568@end ifset
1569where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1570run-time memory.
1571
1572@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1573or symbols needed for relocations.
1574
1575You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1576line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1577
1578@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1579@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1580@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1581@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1582Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1583linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1584arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1585them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1586also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1587objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1588@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1589ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1590@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1591
ff5dcc92 1592The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1593SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1594@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1595runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1596options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1597gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1598file systems.
252b5132 1599
ff5dcc92 1600For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1601followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1602the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1603@end ifset
1604
1605@ifset GENERIC
1606@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1607@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1608@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1609When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1610happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1611of the input files.
1612
1613When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1614non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1615shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1616explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1617specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1618@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1619either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1620appearing multiple times.
1621
28c309a2
NC
1622This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1623that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1624is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1625runtime linker would do.
1626
252b5132 1627The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1628libraries:
252b5132
RH
1629@enumerate
1630@item
ff5dcc92 1631Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1632@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1633Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1634between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1635specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1636used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1637at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1638by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1639the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1640@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1641On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1642@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1643environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1644@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1645On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1646directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1647@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1648For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1649variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1650@item
ec4eb78a
L
1651For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1652@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1653libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1654@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1655@item
252b5132
RH
1656The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1657@item
1658For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1659exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1660@end enumerate
1661
1662If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1663warning and continue with the link.
1664@end ifset
1665
1666@kindex -shared
1667@kindex -Bshareable
1668@item -shared
1669@itemx -Bshareable
1670@cindex shared libraries
1671Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1672and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1673shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1674undefined symbols in the link.
1675
252b5132 1676@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1677@item --sort-common
1678@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1679@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1680This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1681ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1682sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1683eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1684between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1685specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1686
2509a395
SL
1687@kindex --sort-section=name
1688@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1689This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1690patterns in the linker script.
1691
2509a395
SL
1692@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1693@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1694This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1695patterns in the linker script.
1696
252b5132 1697@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1698@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1699Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1700each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1701size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1702
1703@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1704@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1705Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1706output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1707This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1708certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1709cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1710that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1711support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1712input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1713more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1714many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1715
1716@kindex --stats
1717@item --stats
1718Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1719as execution time and memory usage.
1720
2509a395 1721@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1722@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1723Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1724configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1725that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1726
252b5132
RH
1727@kindex --traditional-format
1728@cindex traditional format
1729@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1730For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1731the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1732use the traditional format instead.
1733
1734@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1735For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1736symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1737full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1738@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1739trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1740combine duplicate entries.
1741
2509a395
SL
1742@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1743@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1744Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1745address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1746times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1747line.
1748@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1749for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1750@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1751should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1752sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1753
2509a395
SL
1754@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1755@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1756@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1757@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1758@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1759@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1760@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1761Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1762@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1763
2509a395
SL
1764@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1765@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5
L
1766@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1767When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1768of the first byte of the text segment.
1769
560e09e9
NC
1770@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1771@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1772Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1773values for @samp{method}:
1774
1775@table @samp
1776@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1777Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1778
1779@item report-all
da8bce14 1780Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1781
1782@item ignore-in-object-files
1783Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1784ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1785
1786@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1787Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1788ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1789when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1790libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1791command line.
1792@end table
1793
1794The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1795by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1796
1797Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1798unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1799can change this to a warning.
1800
252b5132
RH
1801@kindex --verbose
1802@cindex verbose
1803@item --dll-verbose
308b1ffd 1804@itemx --verbose
ff5dcc92 1805Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1806supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
b9a8de1e 1807the linker script being used by the linker.
252b5132
RH
1808
1809@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1810@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1811@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1812Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1813used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1814about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
252b5132
RH
1815is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1816@xref{VERSION}.
1817
7ce691ae 1818@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1819@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1820@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1821@item --warn-common
1822Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
560e09e9 1823a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
252b5132
RH
1824but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1825you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
560e09e9 1826Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1827warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1828
1829There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1830
1831@table @samp
1832@item int i = 1;
1833A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1834file.
1835
1836@item extern int i;
1837An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1838There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1839variable somewhere.
1840
1841@item int i;
1842A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1843variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1844The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1845single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1846size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1847a definition of the same variable.
1848@end table
1849
1850The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1851Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1852just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1853encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1854a common symbol.
1855
1856@enumerate
1857@item
1858Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1859definition for the symbol.
1860@smallexample
1861@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1862 overridden by definition
1863@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1864@end smallexample
1865
1866@item
1867Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1868the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1869except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1870@smallexample
1871@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1872 overriding common
1873@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1874@end smallexample
1875
1876@item
1877Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1878@smallexample
1879@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1880 of `@var{symbol}'
1881@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1882@end smallexample
1883
1884@item
1885Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1886@smallexample
1887@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1888 overridden by larger common
1889@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1890@end smallexample
1891
1892@item
1893Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1894the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1895encountered in a different order.
1896@smallexample
1897@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1898 overriding smaller common
1899@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1900@end smallexample
1901@end enumerate
1902
1903@kindex --warn-constructors
1904@item --warn-constructors
1905Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1906object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1907detect the use of global constructors.
1908
1909@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1910@item --warn-multiple-gp
1911Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1912This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1913Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1914section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1915of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1916base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1917base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1918bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1919large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1920values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1921option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1922
1923@kindex --warn-once
1924@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1925@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1926@item --warn-once
1927Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1928which refers to it.
1929
1930@kindex --warn-section-align
1931@cindex warnings, on section alignment
1932@cindex section alignment, warnings on
1933@item --warn-section-align
1934Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1935alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
1936The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
1937is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
1938the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
1939
8fdd7217
NC
1940@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
1941@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 1942Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 1943
a0c402a5
L
1944@kindex --warn-alternate-em
1945@item --warn-alternate-em
1946Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
1947
560e09e9
NC
1948@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
1949@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
1950If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
1951@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
1952This option makes it generate a warning instead.
1953
1954@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
1955@item --error-unresolved-symbols
1956This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
1957it is reporting unresolved symbols.
1958
252b5132
RH
1959@kindex --whole-archive
1960@cindex including an entire archive
1961@item --whole-archive
1962For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 1963@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
1964in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
1965files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
1966library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
1967library. This option may be used more than once.
1968
7ec229ce 1969Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
1970about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
1971Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
1972list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
1973your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
1974
2509a395
SL
1975@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
1976@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
1977Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
1978@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
1979undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
1980@var{symbol}.
1981
1982This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
1983wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
1984wishes to call the system function, it should call
1985@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
1986
1987Here is a trivial example:
1988
1989@smallexample
1990void *
cc2f008e 1991__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 1992@{
cc2f008e 1993 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
1994 return __real_malloc (c);
1995@}
1996@end smallexample
1997
ff5dcc92 1998If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
1999all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2000instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2001call the real @code{malloc} function.
2002
2003You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2004links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2005you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2006file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2007call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2008
6aa29e7b
JJ
2009@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2010@item --eh-frame-hdr
2011Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2012@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2013
6c1439be
L
2014@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2015@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2016@item --enable-new-dtags
2017@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2018This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2019systems may not understand them. If you specify
ff5dcc92
SC
2020@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
2021If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2022created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2023those options are only available for ELF systems.
2024
2d643429 2025@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2026@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2027Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2028close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2029time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2030increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2031value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2032
fdc90cb4
JJ
2033@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2034@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2035Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2036@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2037new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2038the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2039hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2040
35835446
JR
2041@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2042@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2043This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2044linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2045for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2046about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2047
4f9c04f7 2048Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 20491021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2050run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2051has been used.
2052
2053The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2054enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2055
c0065db7
RM
2056@kindex --build-id
2057@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2058@item --build-id
2059@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2060Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2061The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2062file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2063@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2064parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2065@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2066@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2067an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2068characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2069omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2070
2071The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2072that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2073unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2074to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2075file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2076string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2077
2078Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2079@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2080@end table
2081
0285c67d
NC
2082@c man end
2083
36f63dca 2084@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2085
0285c67d
NC
2086@c man begin OPTIONS
2087
ff5dcc92 2088The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2089the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2090normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2091use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2092@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2093like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2094symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2095object file).
2096
2097In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2098support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2099PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2100values by either a space or an equals sign.
2101
ff5dcc92 2102@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2103
2104@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2105@item --add-stdcall-alias
2106If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2107as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2108[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2109
2110@kindex --base-file
2111@item --base-file @var{file}
2112Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2113addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2114@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2115[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2116
2117@kindex --dll
2118@item --dll
2119Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2120@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2121file.
bb10df36 2122[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2123
88183869
DK
2124@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2125@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2126@item --enable-long-section-names
2127@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2128The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2129the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2130for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2131fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2132to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2133allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2134disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2135generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2136as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
3efd345c
DK
2137with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2138GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2139information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2140option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2141section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2142when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2143image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2144[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2145
252b5132
RH
2146@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2147@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2148@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2149@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2150If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2151do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2152only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2153resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2154undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2155@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2156to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2157warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2158import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2159to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2160feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2161@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2162mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2163[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2164
2165@cindex DLLs, creating
2166@kindex --export-all-symbols
2167@item --export-all-symbols
2168If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2169be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2170otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2171explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2172attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2173option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2174@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2175@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2176exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2177re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2178such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2179@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2180@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2181Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2182not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2183extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2184(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2185These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2186@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2187@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2188@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2189@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2190[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2191
2192@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2193@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2194Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2195exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2196[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2197
2198@kindex --file-alignment
2199@item --file-alignment
2200Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2201file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2202512.
bb10df36 2203[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2204
2205@cindex heap size
2206@kindex --heap
2207@item --heap @var{reserve}
2208@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2209Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2210to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2211committed.
bb10df36 2212[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2213
2214@cindex image base
2215@kindex --image-base
2216@item --image-base @var{value}
2217Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2218the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2219is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2220your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2221other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2222for dlls.
bb10df36 2223[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2224
2225@kindex --kill-at
2226@item --kill-at
2227If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2228symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2229[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2230
26d2d8a2
BF
2231@kindex --large-address-aware
2232@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2233If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2234header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2235greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2236or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2237section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2238[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2239
252b5132
RH
2240@kindex --major-image-version
2241@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2242Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2243[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2244
2245@kindex --major-os-version
2246@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2247Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2248[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2249
2250@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2251@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2252Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2253[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2254
2255@kindex --minor-image-version
2256@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2257Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2258[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2259
2260@kindex --minor-os-version
2261@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2262Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2263[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2264
2265@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2266@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2267Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2268[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2269
2270@cindex DEF files, creating
2271@cindex DLLs, creating
2272@kindex --output-def
2273@item --output-def @var{file}
2274The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2275file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2276(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2277library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2278automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2279[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2280
b044cda1
CW
2281@cindex DLLs, creating
2282@kindex --out-implib
2283@item --out-implib @var{file}
2284The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2285import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2286import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2287may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2288makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2289creation step.
bb10df36 2290[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2291
2292@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2293@item --enable-auto-image-base
2294Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2295using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2296from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2297collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2298avoided.
bb10df36 2299[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2300
2301@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2302@item --disable-auto-image-base
2303Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2304user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2305default.
bb10df36 2306[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2307
2308@cindex DLLs, linking to
2309@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2310@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2311When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2312search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2313@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2314between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2315uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2316@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2317[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2318
2319@kindex --enable-auto-import
2320@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2321Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2322DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2323building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2324'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2325to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2326specification published by Microsoft.
2327
e2a83dd0
NC
2328Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2329data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2330placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2331around a problem with consts that is described here:
2332http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2333
4d8907ac
DS
2334Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2335see this message:
0d888aac 2336
ece2d90e 2337"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2338documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2339
ece2d90e
NC
2340This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2341ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2342allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2343fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2344constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2345multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2346this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2347of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2348the warning, and exit.
2349
2350There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2351data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2352
2fa9fc65
NC
2353One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2354of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2355this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2356
c0065db7
RM
2357A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2358that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2359there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2360a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2361
2362@example
2363extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2364extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2365 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2366@end example
2367
2368or
2369
2370@example
2371extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2372extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2373 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2374@end example
2375
c0065db7 2376For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2377is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2378
2379@example
2380extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2381extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2382 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2383@end example
2384
c406afaf
NC
2385or
2386
2387@example
2388extern long long extern_ll;
2389extern_ll -->
2390 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2391@end example
2392
2fa9fc65 2393A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2394'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
560e09e9 2395@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
0d888aac 2396requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2397building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2398merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2399between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2400constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2401
2402Original:
2403@example
2404--foo.h
2405extern int arr[];
2406--foo.c
2407#include "foo.h"
2408void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2409 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2410@}
2411@end example
2412
2413Solution 1:
2414@example
2415--foo.h
2416extern int arr[];
2417--foo.c
2418#include "foo.h"
2419void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2420 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2421 volatile int *parr = arr;
2422 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2423@}
2424@end example
2425
2426Solution 2:
2427@example
2428--foo.h
2429/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2430#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2431 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2432#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2433#else
2434#define FOO_IMPORT
2435#endif
2436extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2437--foo.c
2438#include "foo.h"
2439void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2440 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2441@}
2442@end example
2443
c0065db7 2444A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2445library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2446for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2447functions).
bb10df36 2448[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2449
2450@kindex --disable-auto-import
2451@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2452Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2453@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2454[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2455
2fa9fc65
NC
2456@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2457@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2458If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2459that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2460a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2461environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2462[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2463
2464@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2465@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2466Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2467DLLs. This is the default.
bb10df36 2468[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2469
b044cda1
CW
2470@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2471@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2472Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2473[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2474
252b5132
RH
2475@kindex --section-alignment
2476@item --section-alignment
2477Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2478addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2479[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2480
2481@cindex stack size
2482@kindex --stack
2483@item --stack @var{reserve}
2484@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2485Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2486to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2487committed.
bb10df36 2488[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2489
2490@kindex --subsystem
2491@item --subsystem @var{which}
2492@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2493@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2494Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2495legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2496@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2497the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2498@var{which}.
bb10df36 2499[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2500
2f563b51
DK
2501The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2502of the PE file header:
2503[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2504
2505@kindex --dynamicbase
2506@item --dynamicbase
2507The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2508randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2509Vista for i386 PE targets.
2510
2511@kindex --forceinteg
2512@item --forceinteg
2513Code integrity checks are enforced.
2514
2515@kindex --nxcompat
2516@item --nxcompat
2517The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2518This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2519
2520@kindex --no-isolation
2521@item --no-isolation
2522Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2523
2524@kindex --no-seh
2525@item --no-seh
2526The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2527this image.
2528
2529@kindex --no-bind
2530@item --no-bind
2531Do not bind this image.
2532
2533@kindex --wdmdriver
2534@item --wdmdriver
2535The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2536
2537@kindex --tsaware
2538@item --tsaware
2539The image is Terminal Server aware.
2540
252b5132
RH
2541@end table
2542
0285c67d
NC
2543@c man end
2544
93fd0973
SC
2545@ifset M68HC11
2546@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2547
2548@c man begin OPTIONS
2549
2550The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2551memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2552
2553@table @gcctabopt
2554
2555@kindex --no-trampoline
2556@item --no-trampoline
2557This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2558is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2559instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2560
2561@kindex --bank-window
2562@item --bank-window @var{name}
2563This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2564the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2565The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2566paging and addresses within the memory window.
2567
2568@end table
2569
2570@c man end
2571@end ifset
2572
7fb9f789
NC
2573@ifset M68K
2574@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2575
2576@c man begin OPTIONS
2577
2578The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2579when linking for 68K targets.
2580
2581@table @gcctabopt
2582
2583@kindex --got
2584@item --got=@var{type}
2585This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2586@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2587@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2588Info entry for @file{ld}.
2589
2590@end table
2591
2592@c man end
2593@end ifset
2594
252b5132
RH
2595@ifset UsesEnvVars
2596@node Environment
2597@section Environment Variables
2598
0285c67d
NC
2599@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2600
560e09e9 2601You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2602@ifclear SingleFormat
2603@code{GNUTARGET},
2604@end ifclear
2605@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2606
36f63dca 2607@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2608@kindex GNUTARGET
2609@cindex default input format
2610@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2611use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2612of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2613@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2614of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2615attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2616this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2617there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2618object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2619BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2620in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2621@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2622
2623@kindex LDEMULATION
2624@cindex default emulation
2625@cindex emulation, default
2626@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2627@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2628behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2629available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2630the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2631variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2632linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2633
2634@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2635@cindex demangling, default
2636Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2637@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2638default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2639a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2640may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2641options.
2642
0285c67d
NC
2643@c man end
2644@end ifset
2645
252b5132
RH
2646@node Scripts
2647@chapter Linker Scripts
2648
2649@cindex scripts
2650@cindex linker scripts
2651@cindex command files
2652Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2653written in the linker command language.
2654
2655The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2656the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2657the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2658more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2659direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2660described below.
2661
2662The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2663yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2664linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2665to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2666such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2667
2668You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2669line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2670default linker script.
2671
2672You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2673to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2674Linker Scripts}.
2675
2676@menu
2677* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2678* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2679* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2680* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2681* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2682* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2683* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2684* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2685* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2686* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2687* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2688@end menu
2689
2690@node Basic Script Concepts
2691@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2692@cindex linker script concepts
2693We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2694describe the linker script language.
2695
2696The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2697file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2698@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2699The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2700purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2701among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2702section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2703in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2704
2705Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2706also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2707contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2708the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2709A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2710area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2711loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2712which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2713of debugging information.
2714
2715Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2716first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2717the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2718@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2719section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2720same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2721is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2722(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2723based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2724RAM address would be the VMA.
2725
2726You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2727program with the @samp{-h} option.
2728
2729Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2730@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2731has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2732information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2733will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2734static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2735referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2736
2737You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2738program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2739option.
2740
2741@node Script Format
2742@section Linker Script Format
2743@cindex linker script format
2744Linker scripts are text files.
2745
2746You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2747either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2748symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2749generally ignored.
2750
2751Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2752If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2753otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2754double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2755file name.
2756
2757You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2758@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2759to whitespace.
2760
2761@node Simple Example
2762@section Simple Linker Script Example
2763@cindex linker script example
2764@cindex example of linker script
2765Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2766
2767The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2768@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2769memory layout of the output file.
2770
2771The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2772describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2773code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2774@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2775Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2776your input files.
2777
2778For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
27790x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2780linker script which will do that:
2781@smallexample
2782SECTIONS
2783@{
2784 . = 0x10000;
2785 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2786 . = 0x8000000;
2787 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2788 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2789@}
2790@end smallexample
2791
2792You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2793followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2794descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2795
252b5132
RH
2796The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2797sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2798counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2799other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2800current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2801incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2802@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2803
2804The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2805required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2806after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2807which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2808wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2809means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2810
2811Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2812@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2813@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2814
2815The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2816the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2817at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2818output section, the value of the location counter will be
2819@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2820effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2821immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2822
2823The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2824alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2825example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2826sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2827may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2828sections.
2829
2830That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2831
2832@node Simple Commands
2833@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2834@cindex linker script simple commands
2835In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2836
2837@menu
2838* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2839* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2840@ifclear SingleFormat
2841* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2842@end ifclear
2843
4a93e180 2844* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
2845* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2846@end menu
2847
2848@node Entry Point
36f63dca 2849@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
2850@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2851@cindex start of execution
2852@cindex first instruction
2853@cindex entry point
2854The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2855point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2856entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2857@smallexample
2858ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2859@end smallexample
2860
2861There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2862entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2863stopping when one of them succeeds:
2864@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 2865@item
252b5132 2866the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 2867@item
252b5132 2868the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 2869@item
252b5132 2870the value of the symbol @code{start}, if defined;
a1ab1d2a 2871@item
252b5132 2872the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 2873@item
252b5132
RH
2874The address @code{0}.
2875@end itemize
2876
2877@node File Commands
36f63dca 2878@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
2879@cindex linker script file commands
2880Several linker script commands deal with files.
2881
2882@table @code
2883@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
2884@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
2885@cindex including a linker script
2886Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
2887be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 2888with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
288910 levels deep.
2890
4006703d
NS
2891You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
2892@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
2893
252b5132
RH
2894@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2895@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2896@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
2897@cindex input files in linker scripts
2898@cindex input object files in linker scripts
2899@cindex linker script input object files
2900The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
2901in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
2902
2903For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
2904a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
2905then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
2906
2907In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
2908script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
2909
e3f2db7f
AO
2910In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
2911with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
2912located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
2913for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
2914open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
2915linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
2916description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 2917
ff5dcc92 2918If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
2919name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
2920@samp{-l}.
2921
2922When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
2923files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
2924script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
2925
2926@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2927@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2928@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
2929@cindex grouping input files
2930The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
2931files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
2932new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
2933in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
2934
b717d30e
JJ
2935@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2936@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2937@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
2938This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
2939commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
2940as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
2941with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
2942when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
2943@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
2944and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
2945setting afterwards.
2946
252b5132
RH
2947@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
2948@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 2949@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
2950The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
2951@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
2952@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
2953Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
2954precedence.
2955
2956You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
2957output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
2958
2959@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2960@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2961@cindex library search path in linker script
2962@cindex archive search path in linker script
2963@cindex search path in linker script
2964The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 2965@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
2966@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
2967on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
2968are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
2969the command line option are searched first.
2970
2971@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
2972@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
2973@cindex first input file
2974The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
2975that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
2976though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
2977when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
2978first file.
2979@end table
2980
2981@ifclear SingleFormat
2982@node Format Commands
36f63dca 2983@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
2984A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
2985
2986@table @code
2987@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
2988@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
2989@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
2990@cindex output file format in linker script
2991The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
2992output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 2993exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
2994(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
2995line option takes precedence.
2996
2997You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
2998formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
2999This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3000desired endianness.
3001
3002If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3003will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3004output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3005used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3006
3007For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3008command:
3009@smallexample
3010OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3011@end smallexample
3012This says that the default format for the output file is
3013@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3014option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3015format.
3016
3017@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3018@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3019@cindex input file format in linker script
3020The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3021files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3022This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3023(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3024is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3025command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3026@end table
3027@end ifclear
3028
4a93e180
NC
3029@node REGION_ALIAS
3030@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3031@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3032@cindex region alias
3033@cindex region names
3034
3035Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3036@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3037
3038@smallexample
3039REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3040@end smallexample
3041
3042The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3043memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3044to memory regions. An example follows.
3045
3046Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3047memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3048that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3049non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3050access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3051read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3052sections:
3053
3054@itemize @bullet
3055@item
3056@code{.text} program code;
3057@item
3058@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3059@item
3060@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3061@item
3062@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3063@end itemize
3064
3065The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3066part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3067output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3068systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3069@code{C}:
3070@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3071@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3072@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3073@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3074@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3075@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3076@end multitable
3077The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3078loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3079the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3080the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3081
3082The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3083includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3084memory layout:
3085@smallexample
3086INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3087
3088SECTIONS
3089 @{
3090 .text :
3091 @{
3092 *(.text)
3093 @} > REGION_TEXT
3094 .rodata :
3095 @{
3096 *(.rodata)
3097 rodata_end = .;
3098 @} > REGION_RODATA
3099 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3100 @{
3101 data_start = .;
3102 *(.data)
3103 @} > REGION_DATA
3104 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3105 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3106 .bss :
3107 @{
3108 *(.bss)
3109 @} > REGION_BSS
3110 @}
3111@end smallexample
3112
3113Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3114regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3115variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3116@table @code
3117@item A
3118Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3119@smallexample
3120MEMORY
3121 @{
3122 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3123 @}
3124
3125REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3126REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3127REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3128REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3129@end smallexample
3130@item B
3131Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3132into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3133@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3134@smallexample
3135MEMORY
3136 @{
3137 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3138 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3139 @}
3140
3141REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3142REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3143REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3144REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3145@end smallexample
3146@item C
3147Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3148@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3149initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3150system start into the @code{RAM}.
3151@smallexample
3152MEMORY
3153 @{
3154 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3155 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3156 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3157 @}
3158
3159REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3160REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3161REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3162REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3163@end smallexample
3164@end table
3165
3166It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3167@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3168necessary:
3169@smallexample
3170#include <string.h>
3171
3172extern char data_start [];
3173extern char data_size [];
3174extern char data_load_start [];
3175
3176void copy_data(void)
3177@{
3178 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3179 @{
3180 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3181 @}
3182@}
3183@end smallexample
3184
252b5132 3185@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3186@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3187There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3188
3189@table @code
3190@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3191@kindex ASSERT
3192@cindex assertion in linker script
3193Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3194with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3195
3196@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3197@kindex EXTERN
3198@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3199Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3200symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3201modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3202each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3203command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3204
3205@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3206@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3207@cindex common allocation in linker script
3208This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3209to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3210output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3211
4818e05f
AM
3212@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3213@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3214@cindex common allocation in linker script
3215This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3216command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3217to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3218
53d25da6
AM
3219@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3220@kindex INSERT
3221@cindex insert user script into default script
3222This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3223augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3224inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3225@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3226default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3227sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3228linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3229insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3230linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3231default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3232of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3233to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3234is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3235
3236@smallexample
3237SECTIONS
3238@{
3239 OVERLAY :
3240 @{
3241 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3242 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3243 @}
3244@}
3245INSERT AFTER .text;
3246@end smallexample
3247
252b5132
RH
3248@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3249@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3250@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3251This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3252references among certain output sections.
3253
3254In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3255using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3256will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3257errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3258a function defined in the other section.
3259
3260The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3261@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3262an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3263@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3264names.
3265
3266@ifclear SingleFormat
3267@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3268@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3269@cindex machine architecture
3270@cindex architecture
3271Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3272of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3273architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3274the @samp{-f} option.
3275@end ifclear
3276@end table
3277
3278@node Assignments
3279@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3280@cindex assignment in scripts
3281@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3282@cindex variables, defining
3283You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3284the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3285
3286@menu
3287* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3288* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3289* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3290* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3291@end menu
3292
3293@node Simple Assignments
3294@subsection Simple Assignments
3295
3296You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3297
3298@table @code
3299@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3300@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3301@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3302@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3303@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3304@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3305@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3306@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3307@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3308@end table
3309
3310The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3311@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3312defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3313
3314The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3315may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3316
3317The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3318
3319Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3320
3321You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3322statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3323section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3324
3325The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3326expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3327
3328Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3329assignments may be used:
3330
3331@smallexample
3332floating_point = 0;
3333SECTIONS
3334@{
3335 .text :
3336 @{
3337 *(.text)
3338 _etext = .;
3339 @}
156e34dd 3340 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3341 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3342@}
3343@end smallexample
3344@noindent
3345In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3346zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3347the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3348defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3349upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3350
3351@node PROVIDE
3352@subsection PROVIDE
3353@cindex PROVIDE
3354In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3355only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3356the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3357@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3358@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3359@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3360@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3361@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3362
3363Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3364@smallexample
3365SECTIONS
3366@{
3367 .text :
3368 @{
3369 *(.text)
3370 _etext = .;
3371 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3372 @}
3373@}
3374@end smallexample
3375
3376In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3377underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3378the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3379underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3380If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3381linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3382
7af8e998
L
3383@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3384@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3385@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3386Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3387hidden and won't be exported.
3388
73ae6183
NC
3389@node Source Code Reference
3390@subsection Source Code Reference
3391
3392Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3393intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3394a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3395symbol that does not have a value.
3396
3397Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3398transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3399stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3400prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3401mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3402of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3403variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3404linker script variable might be referred to as:
3405
3406@smallexample
3407 extern int foo;
3408@end smallexample
3409
3410But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3411
3412@smallexample
3413 _foo = 1000;
3414@end smallexample
3415
3416In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3417transformation has taken place.
3418
3419When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3420things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3421in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3422second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3423table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3424contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3425value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3426
3427@smallexample
3428 int foo = 1000;
3429@end smallexample
3430
3431creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3432holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3433number 1000 is initially stored.
3434
3435When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3436first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3437memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3438So:
3439
3440@smallexample
3441 foo = 1;
3442@end smallexample
3443
3444looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3445associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3446address. Whereas:
3447
3448@smallexample
3449 int * a = & foo;
3450@end smallexample
3451
3452looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3453and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3454the variable @samp{a}.
3455
3456Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3457the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3458an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3459
3460@smallexample
3461 foo = 1000;
3462@end smallexample
3463
3464creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3465the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3466address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3467linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3468access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3469
3470Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3471you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3472use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3473section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3474linker script contains these declarations:
3475
3476@smallexample
3477@group
3478 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3479 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3480 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3481@end group
3482@end smallexample
3483
3484Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3485
3486@smallexample
3487@group
3488 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3489
73ae6183
NC
3490 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3491@end group
3492@end smallexample
3493
3494Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3495
252b5132 3496@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3497@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3498@kindex SECTIONS
3499The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3500into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3501
3502The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3503@smallexample
3504SECTIONS
3505@{
3506 @var{sections-command}
3507 @var{sections-command}
3508 @dots{}
3509@}
3510@end smallexample
3511
3512Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3513
3514@itemize @bullet
3515@item
3516an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3517@item
3518a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3519@item
3520an output section description
3521@item
3522an overlay description
3523@end itemize
3524
3525The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3526@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3527those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3528understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3529the layout of the output file.
3530
3531Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3532below.
3533
3534If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3535linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3536section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3537input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3538example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3539in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3540
3541@menu
3542* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3543* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3544* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3545* Input Section:: Input section description
3546* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3547* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3548* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3549* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3550* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3551@end menu
3552
3553@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3554@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3555The full description of an output section looks like this:
3556@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3557@group
7e7d5768 3558@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
3559 [AT(@var{lma})]
3560 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
3561 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3562 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3563 @{
3564 @var{output-section-command}
3565 @var{output-section-command}
3566 @dots{}
562d3460 3567 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3568@end group
3569@end smallexample
3570
3571Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3572
3573The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3574name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3575The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3576
3577Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3578
3579@itemize @bullet
3580@item
3581a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3582@item
3583an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3584@item
3585data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3586@item
3587a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3588@end itemize
3589
3590@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3591@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3592@cindex name, section
3593@cindex section name
3594The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3595meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3596support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3597must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3598example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3599output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3600names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3601quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3602characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3603commas must be quoted.
3604
3605The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3606Discarding}.
3607
3608@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3609@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3610@cindex address, section
3611@cindex section address
3612The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3613address) of the output section. If you do not provide @var{address},
3614the linker will set it based on @var{region} if present, or otherwise
3615based on the current value of the location counter.
3616
3617If you provide @var{address}, the address of the output section will be
3618set to precisely that. If you provide neither @var{address} nor
3619@var{region}, then the address of the output section will be set to the
3620current value of the location counter aligned to the alignment
3621requirements of the output section. The alignment requirement of the
3622output section is the strictest alignment of any input section contained
3623within the output section.
3624
3625For example,
3626@smallexample
3627.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3628@end smallexample
3629@noindent
3630and
3631@smallexample
3632.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3633@end smallexample
3634@noindent
3635are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3636@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3637counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
3638counter aligned to the strictest alignment of a @samp{.text} input
3639section.
3640
3641The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3642For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3643so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3644do something like this:
3645@smallexample
3646.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3647@end smallexample
3648@noindent
3649This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3650aligned upward to the specified value.
3651
3652Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3653location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3654sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3655
3656@node Input Section
36f63dca 3657@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3658@cindex input sections
3659@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3660The most common output section command is an input section description.
3661
3662The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3663You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3664in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3665map the input files into your memory layout.
3666
3667@menu
3668* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3669* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3670* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3671* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3672* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3673@end menu
3674
3675@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3676@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3677@cindex input section basics
3678An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3679by a list of section names in parentheses.
3680
3681The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3682describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3683
3684The most common input section description is to include all input
3685sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3686include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3687@smallexample
3688*(.text)
3689@end smallexample
3690@noindent
18625d54
CM
3691Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3692of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3693match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3694example:
252b5132 3695@smallexample
b4346c09 3696*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3697@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3698will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3699@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3700
3701There are two ways to include more than one section:
3702@smallexample
3703*(.text .rdata)
3704*(.text) *(.rdata)
3705@end smallexample
3706@noindent
3707The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3708@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3709first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3710they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3711@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3712@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3713
3714You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3715You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3716needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3717@smallexample
3718data.o(.data)
3719@end smallexample
3720
967928e9
AM
3721You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3722matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3723with no whitespace around the colon.
3724
3725@table @samp
3726@item archive:file
3727matches file within archive
3728@item archive:
3729matches the whole archive
3730@item :file
3731matches file but not one in an archive
3732@end table
3733
3734Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3735wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3736single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3737@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3738within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3739also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3740other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3741from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3742command.
3743
252b5132
RH
3744If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3745the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3746commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3747@smallexample
3748data.o
3749@end smallexample
3750
967928e9
AM
3751When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3752and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
3753characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3754name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3755did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3756though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3757@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3758the archive search path.
3759
3760@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 3761@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
3762@cindex input section wildcards
3763@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3764@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3765@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3766In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3767name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3768
3769The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3770pattern for the file name.
3771
3772The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3773
3774@table @samp
3775@item *
3776matches any number of characters
3777@item ?
3778matches any single character
3779@item [@var{chars}]
3780matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3781character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3782@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3783@item \
3784quotes the following character
3785@end table
3786
3787When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3788will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3789Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3790exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3791@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3792a @samp{/} character.
3793
3794File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3795specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3796does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3797
3798If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3799appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3800will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3801sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3802@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3803@smallexample
3804.data : @{ *(.data) @}
3805.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3806@end smallexample
3807
bcaa7b3e 3808@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
3809Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3810in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
3811this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3812pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
3813@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
3814into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3815
bcaa7b3e
L
3816@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3817@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3818difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3819ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3820
3821@cindex SORT
3822@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3823
3824When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3825can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3826
3827@enumerate
3828@item
3829@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3830It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
3831sections have the same name.
3832@item
3833@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3834It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
3835sections have the same alignment.
3836@item
c0065db7 3837@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
3838treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
3839@item
3840@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
3841is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
3842@item
3843All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
3844@end enumerate
3845
3846When both command line section sorting option and linker script
3847section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
3848takes precedence over the command line option.
3849
3850If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
3851command line option will make the section sorting command to be
3852treated as nested sorting command.
3853
3854@enumerate
3855@item
3856@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
3857@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
3858@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3859@item
3860@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
3861@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
3862@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3863@end enumerate
3864
3865If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
3866command line option will be ignored.
3867
252b5132
RH
3868If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
3869@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
3870precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
3871
3872This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
3873files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
3874sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
3875The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
3876with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
3877linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
3878@smallexample
3879@group
3880SECTIONS @{
3881 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3882 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
3883 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3884 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3885@}
3886@end group
3887@end smallexample
3888
3889@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 3890@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
3891@cindex common symbol placement
3892@cindex uninitialized data placement
3893A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
3894file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
3895linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
3896named @samp{COMMON}.
3897
3898You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
3899other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
3900particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
3901input files are placed in another section.
3902
3903In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
3904@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
3905@smallexample
3906.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
3907@end smallexample
3908
3909@cindex scommon section
3910@cindex small common symbols
3911Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
3912example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
3913symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
3914different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
3915the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
3916symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
3917to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
3918locations.
3919
3920@cindex [COMMON]
3921You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
3922notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
3923@samp{*(COMMON)}.
3924
3925@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 3926@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
3927@cindex KEEP
3928@cindex garbage collection
3929When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 3930it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
3931This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
3932with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 3933@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
3934
3935@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 3936@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
3937The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
3938to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
3939start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
3940@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
3941follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
3942@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
3943@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
3944All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
3945files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
3946
3947@smallexample
3948@group
3949SECTIONS @{
3950 outputa 0x10000 :
3951 @{
3952 all.o
3953 foo.o (.input1)
3954 @}
36f63dca
NC
3955@end group
3956@group
252b5132
RH
3957 outputb :
3958 @{
3959 foo.o (.input2)
3960 foo1.o (.input1)
3961 @}
36f63dca
NC
3962@end group
3963@group
252b5132
RH
3964 outputc :
3965 @{
3966 *(.input1)
3967 *(.input2)
3968 @}
3969@}
3970@end group
a1ab1d2a 3971@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
3972
3973@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 3974@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
3975@cindex data
3976@cindex section data
3977@cindex output section data
3978@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
3979@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
3980@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
3981@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
3982@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
3983You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
3984@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
3985an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
3986parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
3987value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
3988counter.
3989
3990The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
3991store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
3992bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
3993stored.
3994
3995For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
3996of the symbol @samp{addr}:
3997@smallexample
3998BYTE(1)
3999LONG(addr)
4000@end smallexample
4001
4002When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4003same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4004target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4005@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4006@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4007
4008If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4009which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4010When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4011true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4012endianness of the first input object file.
4013
36f63dca 4014Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4015between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4016@smallexample
4017SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4018@end smallexample
4019whereas this will work:
4020@smallexample
4021SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4022@end smallexample
4023
252b5132
RH
4024@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4025@cindex holes, filling
4026@cindex unspecified memory
4027You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4028current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4029otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4030gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4031with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4032necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4033point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4034than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4035different parts of an output section.
4036
4037This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4038value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4039@smallexample
563e308f 4040FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4041@end smallexample
4042
4043The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4044section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4045part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4046entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4047precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4048expression.
252b5132
RH
4049
4050@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4051@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4052There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4053commands.
4054
4055@table @code
4056@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4057@cindex input filename symbols
4058@cindex filename symbols
4059@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4060The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4061The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4062file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4063the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4064
4065This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4066normally used for any other object file format.
4067
4068@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4069@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4070@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4071@item CONSTRUCTORS
4072When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4073unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4074destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4075arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4076automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4077For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4078linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4079@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4080ignored for other object file formats.
4081
4082The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4083constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4084Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4085the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4086first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4087of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4088compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4089formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4090@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4091the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4092destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4093@code{exit}.
4094
4095For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4096arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4097addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4098and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4099linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4100runtime code expects to see.
4101
4102@smallexample
4103 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4104 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4105 *(.ctors)
4106 LONG(0)
4107 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4108 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4109 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4110 *(.dtors)
4111 LONG(0)
4112 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4113@end smallexample
4114
4115If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4116which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4117are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4118are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4119command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4120@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4121@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4122@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4123
4124Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4125and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4126need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4127scripts.
4128
4129@end table
4130
4131@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4132@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4133@cindex discarding sections
4134@cindex sections, discarding
4135@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
4136The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4137for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4138be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4139@smallexample
49c13adb 4140.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4141@end smallexample
4142@noindent
4143will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4144@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4145sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4146space in an output section will also create the output section.
4147
a0976ea4 4148The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4149on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4150symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4151the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4152section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4153
4154@cindex /DISCARD/
4155The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4156input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4157section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4158
4159@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4160@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4161@cindex output section attributes
4162We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4163like this:
0c71d759 4164
252b5132 4165@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4166@group
7e7d5768 4167@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4168 [AT(@var{lma})]
4169 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4170 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4171 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4172 @{
4173 @var{output-section-command}
4174 @var{output-section-command}
4175 @dots{}
562d3460 4176 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4177@end group
4178@end smallexample
0c71d759 4179
252b5132
RH
4180We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4181@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4182remaining section attributes.
4183
a1ab1d2a 4184@menu
252b5132
RH
4185* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4186* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4187* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4188* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4189* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4190* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4191* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4192* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4193@end menu
4194
4195@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4196@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4197Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4198parentheses. The following types are defined:
4199
4200@table @code
4201@item NOLOAD
4202The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4203loaded into memory when the program is run.
4204@item DSECT
4205@itemx COPY
4206@itemx INFO
4207@itemx OVERLAY
4208These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4209rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4210marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4211section when the program is run.
4212@end table
4213
4214@kindex NOLOAD
4215@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4216@cindex loading, preventing
4217The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4218the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4219the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4220@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4221need to be loaded when the program is run. The contents of the
4222@samp{ROM} section will appear in the linker output file as usual.
4223@smallexample
4224@group
4225SECTIONS @{
4226 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4227 @dots{}
4228@}
4229@end group
4230@end smallexample
4231
4232@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4233@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4234@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4235@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4236@cindex load address
4237@cindex section load address
4238Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4239@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The address expression which may appear in
4240an output section description sets the VMA (@pxref{Output Section
4241Address}).
4242
dc0b6aa0
AM
4243The expression @var{lma} that follows the @code{AT} keyword specifies
4244the load address of the section.
6bdafbeb
NC
4245
4246Alternatively, with @samp{AT>@var{lma_region}} expression, you may
4247specify a memory region for the section's load address. @xref{MEMORY}.
4248Note that if the section has not had a VMA assigned to it then the
4249linker will use the @var{lma_region} as the VMA region as well.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4250
4251If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4252section, the linker will set the LMA such that the difference between
4253VMA and LMA for the section is the same as the preceding output
4254section in the same region. If there is no preceding output section
4255or the section is not allocatable, the linker will set the LMA equal
4256to the VMA.
6bdafbeb 4257@xref{Output Section Region}.
252b5132
RH
4258
4259@cindex ROM initialized data
4260@cindex initialized data in ROM
4261This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4262example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4263called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4264@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4265even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4266uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4267defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4268counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4269
4270@smallexample
4271@group
4272SECTIONS
4273 @{
4274 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4275 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4276 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4277 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4278 .bss 0x3000 :
4279 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4280@}
4281@end group
4282@end smallexample
4283
4284The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4285this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4286the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4287how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4288script.
4289
4290@smallexample
4291@group
4292extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4293char *src = &_etext;
4294char *dst = &_data;
4295
4296/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4297while (dst < &_edata) @{
4298 *dst++ = *src++;
4299@}
4300
4301/* Zero bss */
4302for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4303 *dst = 0;
4304@end group
4305@end smallexample
4306
bbf115d3
L
4307@node Forced Output Alignment
4308@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4309@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4310@cindex forcing output section alignment
4311@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 4312You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 4313
7e7d5768
AM
4314@node Forced Input Alignment
4315@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4316@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4317@cindex forcing input section alignment
4318@cindex input section alignment
4319You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4320SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4321sections, whether larger or smaller.
4322
0c71d759
NC
4323@node Output Section Constraint
4324@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4325@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4326@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4327@cindex constraints on output sections
4328You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4329of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4330read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4331@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4332
252b5132 4333@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4334@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4335@kindex >@var{region}
4336@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4337@cindex memory regions and sections
4338You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4339using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4340
4341Here is a simple example:
4342@smallexample
4343@group
4344MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4345SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4346@end group
4347@end smallexample
4348
4349@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4350@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4351@kindex :@var{phdr}
4352@cindex section, assigning to program header
4353@cindex program headers and sections
4354You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4355using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4356one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4357assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4358@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4359linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4360
4361Here is a simple example:
4362@smallexample
4363@group
4364PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4365SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4366@end group
4367@end smallexample
4368
4369@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4370@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4371@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4372@cindex section fill pattern
4373@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4374You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4375@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4376(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4377within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4378alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4379necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4380of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4381an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4382fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4383other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4384pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4385expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4386
4387You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4388output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4389
4390Here is a simple example:
4391@smallexample
4392@group
563e308f 4393SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4394@end group
4395@end smallexample
4396
4397@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4398@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4399@kindex OVERLAY
4400@cindex overlays
4401An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4402are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4403the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4404copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4405required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4406can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4407than another.
4408
4409Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4410@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4411output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4412command is as follows:
4413@smallexample
4414@group
4415OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4416 @{
4417 @var{secname1}
4418 @{
4419 @var{output-section-command}
4420 @var{output-section-command}
4421 @dots{}
4422 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4423 @var{secname2}
4424 @{
4425 @var{output-section-command}
4426 @var{output-section-command}
4427 @dots{}
4428 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4429 @dots{}
4430 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4431@end group
4432@end smallexample
4433
4434Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4435section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4436section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4437those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4438except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4439sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4440
4441The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4442addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4443memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4444whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4445and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4446and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4447
4448If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4449among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4450all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4451section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4452NOCROSSREFS}.
4453
4454For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4455provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4456defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4457@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4458the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4459within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4460symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4461
4462At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4463the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4464
4465Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4466@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4467@smallexample
4468@group
4469 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4470 @{
4471 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4472 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4473 @}
4474@end group
4475@end smallexample
4476@noindent
4477This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4478address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4479@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4480following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4481@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4482@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4483
4484C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4485like the following.
4486
4487@smallexample
4488@group
4489 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4490 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4491 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4492@end group
4493@end smallexample
4494
4495Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4496everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4497example could have been written identically as follows.
4498
4499@smallexample
4500@group
4501 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4502 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4503 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4504 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4505 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4506 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4507 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4508@end group
4509@end smallexample
4510
4511@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4512@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4513@kindex MEMORY
4514@cindex memory regions
4515@cindex regions of memory
4516@cindex allocating memory
4517@cindex discontinuous memory
4518The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4519memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4520
4521The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4522memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4523may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4524can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4525set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4526regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4527around to fit into the available regions.
4528
4529A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4530command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4531you wish. The syntax is:
4532@smallexample
4533@group
a1ab1d2a 4534MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4535 @{
4536 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4537 @dots{}
4538 @}
4539@end group
4540@end smallexample
4541
4542The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4543region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4544Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4545with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4546must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4547add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4548command.
252b5132
RH
4549
4550@cindex memory region attributes
4551The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4552whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4553not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4554@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4555section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4556the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4557them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4558
4559The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4560@table @samp
4561@item R
4562Read-only section
4563@item W
4564Read/write section
4565@item X
4566Executable section
4567@item A
4568Allocatable section
4569@item I
4570Initialized section
4571@item L
4572Same as @samp{I}
4573@item !
4574Invert the sense of any of the preceding attributes
4575@end table
4576
4577If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4578@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4579attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4580in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4581attributes.
4582
4583@kindex ORIGIN =
4584@kindex o =
4585@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4586The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4587the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4588cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4589abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4590@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4591
4592@kindex LENGTH =
4593@kindex len =
4594@kindex l =
4595The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4596region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4597be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4598@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4599
4600In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4601available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4602and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4603linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4604is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4605or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4606explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4607region.
4608
4609@smallexample
4610@group
a1ab1d2a 4611MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4612 @{
4613 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4614 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4615 @}
4616@end group
4617@end smallexample
4618
4619Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4620specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4621@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4622a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4623output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4624was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4625the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4626output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4627region, the linker will issue an error message.
4628
3ec57632 4629It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4630expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4631@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4632
4633@smallexample
4634@group
c0065db7 4635 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4636@end group
4637@end smallexample
4638
252b5132
RH
4639@node PHDRS
4640@section PHDRS Command
4641@kindex PHDRS
4642@cindex program headers
4643@cindex ELF program headers
4644@cindex program segments
4645@cindex segments, ELF
4646The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4647@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4648loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4649program with the @samp{-p} option.
4650
4651When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4652reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4653program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4654This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4655interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4656
4657The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4658in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4659precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4660the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4661not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4662
4663The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4664generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4665ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4666
4667This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4668@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4669
4670@smallexample
4671@group
4672PHDRS
4673@{
4674 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4675 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4676@}
4677@end group
4678@end smallexample
4679
4680The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4681of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4682header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4683with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
4684must have a distinct name.
4685
4686Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4687system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4688specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4689sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4690attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4691Section Phdr}.
4692
4693It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4694merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4695repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4696contain the section.
4697
4698If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4699then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4700not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4701convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4702placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4703default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4704segment at all.
4705
4706@kindex FILEHDR
4707@kindex PHDRS
4708You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords appear after
4709the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4710The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4711file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
4712include the ELF program headers themselves.
4713
4714The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4715value of the keyword.
4716
4717@table @asis
4718@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4719Indicates an unused program header.
4720
4721@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4722Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4723the file.
4724
4725@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4726Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4727
4728@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4729Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4730found.
4731
4732@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4733Indicates a segment holding note information.
4734
4735@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4736A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4737ABI.
4738
4739@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4740Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4741
4742@item @var{expression}
4743An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4744be used for types not defined above.
4745@end table
4746
4747You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4748in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4749@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4750Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4751output section attribute.
4752
4753The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4754which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4755explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4756an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4757header.
4758
4759Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4760headers used on a native ELF system.
4761
4762@example
4763@group
4764PHDRS
4765@{
4766 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4767 interp PT_INTERP ;
4768 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4769 data PT_LOAD ;
4770 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4771@}
4772
4773SECTIONS
4774@{
4775 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4776 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4777 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4778 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4779 @dots{}
4780 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4781 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4782 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4783 @dots{}
4784@}
4785@end group
4786@end example
4787
4788@node VERSION
4789@section VERSION Command
4790@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4791@cindex symbol versions
4792@cindex version script
4793@cindex versions of symbols
4794The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
4795only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
4796symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4797a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4798shared library.
4799
4800You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4801you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
4802also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
4803
4804The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
4805@smallexample
4806VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
4807@end smallexample
4808
4809The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
4810Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
4811version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
4812version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
4813version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
4814scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
4815library.
4816
4817The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
4818examples.
4819
4820@smallexample
4821VERS_1.1 @{
4822 global:
4823 foo1;
4824 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
4825 old*;
4826 original*;
4827 new*;
252b5132
RH
4828@};
4829
4830VERS_1.2 @{
4831 foo2;
4832@} VERS_1.1;
4833
4834VERS_2.0 @{
4835 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 4836 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb
MM
4837 ns::*;
4838 "int f(int, double)";
c0065db7 4839 @}
252b5132
RH
4840@} VERS_1.2;
4841@end smallexample
4842
4843This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
4844version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
4845The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
4846a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
4847of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
4848symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
4849is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
4850in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
4851However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
4852name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
4853
4854Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
4855depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
4856to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
4857
4858Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
4859depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
4860and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
4861
4862When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
4863specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
4864unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 4865unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
4866somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
4867wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
4868wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
4869set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
4870ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
4871
4872The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
4873they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
4874could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
4875However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
4876
0f6bf451 4877Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
4878in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
4879symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
4880won't.
4881
4882@smallexample
7c9c73be 4883@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 4884@end smallexample
6b9b879a 4885
252b5132
RH
4886When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
4887symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
4888requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
4889shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
4890loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
4891linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
4892application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
4893way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
4894all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
4895search for each symbol reference.
4896
4897The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
4898doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
4899that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
4900functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
4901the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
4902required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
4903that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
4904versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
4905the libraries being used with the application are too old.
4906
4907There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
4908first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
4909source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
4910script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
4911maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
4912@smallexample
4913__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4914@end smallexample
4915@noindent
4916in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
4917be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
4918The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
4919@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
4920takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
4921
4922The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
4923function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
4924an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
4925version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
4926linked against the old interface to continue to function.
4927
4928To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
4929source file. Here is an example:
4930
4931@smallexample
4932__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
4933__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4934__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
4935__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
4936@end smallexample
4937
4938In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
4939unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
4940example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
4941@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
4942
4943When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
4944some way to specify a default version to which external references to
4945this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
4946@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
4947declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
4948you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
4949
4950If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
4951within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 4952(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
4953specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
4954
cb840a31
L
4955You can also specify the language in the version script:
4956
4957@smallexample
4958VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
4959@end smallexample
4960
c0065db7 4961The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
4962The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
4963demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
4964patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}.
4965
86043bbb
MM
4966Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
4967described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
4968or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
4969the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
4970whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
4971cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
4972might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
4973should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
4974expect when you upgrade.
4975
252b5132
RH
4976@node Expressions
4977@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
4978@cindex expressions
4979@cindex arithmetic
4980The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
4981that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
4982expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
4983host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
4984
4985You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
4986
4987The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
4988expressions.
4989
4990@menu
4991* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 4992* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 4993* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 4994* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
4995* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
4996* Operators:: Operators
4997* Evaluation:: Evaluation
4998* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
4999* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5000@end menu
5001
5002@node Constants
5003@subsection Constants
5004@cindex integer notation
5005@cindex constants in linker scripts
5006All constants are integers.
5007
5008As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5009octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8
NC
5010hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5011@samp{H} for hexadeciaml, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5012@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5013value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5014
5015@cindex scaled integers
5016@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5017@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5018@cindex suffixes for integers
5019@cindex integer suffixes
5020In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5021constant by
5022@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5023@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5024@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5025@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5026@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5027@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5028@tex
5029${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5030@end tex
5031@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5032respectively. For example, the following
5033all refer to the same quantity:
5034
252b5132 5035@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5036_fourk_1 = 4K;
5037_fourk_2 = 4096;
5038_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5039_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5040@end smallexample
5041
8a308ae8
NC
5042Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5043conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5044
0c71d759
NC
5045@node Symbolic Constants
5046@subsection Symbolic Constants
5047@cindex symbolic constants
5048@kindex CONSTANT
5049It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5050the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5051
5052@table @code
5053@item MAXPAGESIZE
5054@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5055The target's maximum page size.
5056
5057@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5058@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5059The target's default page size.
5060@end table
5061
5062So for example:
5063
5064@smallexample
5065 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5066@end smallexample
5067
5068will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5069supported by the target.
5070
252b5132
RH
5071@node Symbols
5072@subsection Symbol Names
5073@cindex symbol names
5074@cindex names
5075@cindex quoted symbol names
5076@kindex "
5077Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5078and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5079Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5080specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5081keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5082@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5083"SECTION" = 9;
5084"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5085@end smallexample
5086
5087Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5088to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5089whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5090
ecca9871
L
5091@node Orphan Sections
5092@subsection Orphan Sections
5093@cindex orphan
5094Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5095are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5096script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5097output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5098placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5099attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5100same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5101If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5102at the end of the file.
5103
5104For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5105well as section flag.
5106
41911f68 5107If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5108the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
41911f68
NC
5109__start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5110section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5111orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5112representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5113character.
5114
252b5132
RH
5115@node Location Counter
5116@subsection The Location Counter
5117@kindex .
5118@cindex dot
5119@cindex location counter
5120@cindex current output location
5121The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5122current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5123location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5124within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5125anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5126
5127@cindex holes
5128Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5129moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5130location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5131and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5132doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5133
5134@smallexample
5135SECTIONS
5136@{
5137 output :
5138 @{
5139 file1(.text)
5140 . = . + 1000;
5141 file2(.text)
5142 . += 1000;
5143 file3(.text)
563e308f 5144 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5145@}
5146@end smallexample
5147@noindent
5148In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5149located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5150followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5151@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5152@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5153specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5154
5c6bbab8
NC
5155@cindex dot inside sections
5156Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5157current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5158statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5159absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5160however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5161not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5162
5163@smallexample
5164SECTIONS
5165@{
5166 . = 0x100
5167 .text: @{
5168 *(.text)
5169 . = 0x200
5170 @}
5171 . = 0x500
5172 .data: @{
5173 *(.data)
5174 . += 0x600
5175 @}
5176@}
5177@end smallexample
5178
5179The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5180and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5181the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5182much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5183move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5184and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5185the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5186the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5187
b5666f2f
AM
5188@cindex dot outside sections
5189Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5190output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5191needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5192
5193@smallexample
5194SECTIONS
5195@{
5196 start_of_text = . ;
5197 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5198 end_of_text = . ;
5199
5200 start_of_data = . ;
5201 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5202 end_of_data = . ;
5203@}
5204@end smallexample
5205
5206If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5207not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5208between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5209should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5210blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5211the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5212sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5213statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5214special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5215place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5216as follows:
5217
5218@smallexample
5219SECTIONS
5220@{
5221 start_of_text = . ;
5222 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5223 end_of_text = . ;
5224
5225 start_of_data = . ;
5226 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5227 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5228 end_of_data = . ;
5229@}
5230@end smallexample
5231
5232This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5233@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5234placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5235assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5236a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5237section. So you could write:
5238
5239@smallexample
5240SECTIONS
5241@{
5242 start_of_text = . ;
5243 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5244 end_of_text = . ;
5245
5246 . = . ;
5247 start_of_data = . ;
5248 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5249 end_of_data = . ;
5250@}
5251@end smallexample
5252
5253Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5254@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5255
252b5132
RH
5256@need 2000
5257@node Operators
5258@subsection Operators
5259@cindex operators for arithmetic
5260@cindex arithmetic operators
5261@cindex precedence in expressions
5262The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5263the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5264@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5265@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5266@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5267@smallexample
5268precedence associativity Operators Notes
5269(highest)
52701 left ! - ~ (1)
52712 left * / %
52723 left + -
52734 left >> <<
52745 left == != > < <= >=
52756 left &
52767 left |
52778 left &&
52789 left ||
527910 right ? :
528011 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5281(lowest)
5282@end smallexample
5283Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5284(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5285(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5286@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5287@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5288@tex
5289\vskip \baselineskip
5290%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5291\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5292\hrule
5293\halign
5294{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5295height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5296&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5297height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5298\noalign{\hrule}
5299height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5300&highest&&&&&\cr
5301% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5302&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5303&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5304&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5305&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5306&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5307&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5308&7&&left&&|&\cr
5309&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5310&9&&left&&||&\cr
5311&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5312&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5313&lowest&&&&&\cr
5314height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5315\hrule}
5316@end tex
5317@iftex
5318{
5319@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5320@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5321@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5322}
5323@end iftex
5324@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5325
5326@node Evaluation
5327@subsection Evaluation
5328@cindex lazy evaluation
5329@cindex expression evaluation order
5330The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5331an expression when absolutely necessary.
5332
5333The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5334address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5335regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5336as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5337
5338However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5339until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5340other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5341for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5342
5343The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5344assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5345allocation.
5346
5347Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5348@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5349
5350If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5351available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5352following
5353@smallexample
5354@group
5355SECTIONS
5356 @{
a1ab1d2a 5357 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5358 @{ *(.text) @}
5359 @}
5360@end group
5361@end smallexample
5362@noindent
5363will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5364address}.
5365
5366@node Expression Section
5367@subsection The Section of an Expression
5368@cindex expression sections
5369@cindex absolute expressions
5370@cindex relative expressions
5371@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5372@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5373@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5374When the linker evaluates an expression, the result is either absolute
5375or relative to some section. A relative expression is expressed as a
5376fixed offset from the base of a section.
5377
5378The position of the expression within the linker script determines
5379whether it is absolute or relative. An expression which appears within
5380an output section definition is relative to the base of the output
5381section. An expression which appears elsewhere will be absolute.
5382
5383A symbol set to a relative expression will be relocatable if you request
5384relocatable output using the @samp{-r} option. That means that a
5385further link operation may change the value of the symbol. The symbol's
5386section will be the section of the relative expression.
5387
5388A symbol set to an absolute expression will retain the same value
5389through any further link operation. The symbol will be absolute, and
5390will not have any particular associated section.
5391
5392You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5393to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5394create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5395section @samp{.data}:
5396@smallexample
5397SECTIONS
5398 @{
5399 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5400 @}
5401@end smallexample
5402@noindent
5403If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5404@samp{.data} section.
5405
5406@node Builtin Functions
5407@subsection Builtin Functions
5408@cindex functions in expressions
5409The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5410use in linker script expressions.
5411
5412@table @code
5413@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5414@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5415@cindex expression, absolute
5416Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5417of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5418value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5419normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5420
5421@item ADDR(@var{section})
5422@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5423@cindex section address in expression
5424Return the absolute address (the VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5425script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5426the following example, @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned
5427identical values:
5428@smallexample
5429@group
5430SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5431 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5432 @{
252b5132
RH
5433 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5434 @dots{}
5435 @}
5436 .output :
5437 @{
5438 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5439 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5440 @}
5441@dots{} @}
5442@end group
5443@end smallexample
5444
876f4090
NS
5445@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5446@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5447@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5448@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5449@cindex round up location counter
5450@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5451@cindex round up expression
5452@cindex align expression
5453Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5454to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5455doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5456arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5457expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5458equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5459
5460Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5461next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5462variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5463input sections:
252b5132
RH
5464@smallexample
5465@group
5466SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5467 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5468 *(.data)
5469 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5470 @}
5471@dots{} @}
5472@end group
5473@end smallexample
5474@noindent
5475The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5476a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5477a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5478of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5479
5480The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5481
362c1d1a
NS
5482@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5483@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5484@cindex section alignment
5485Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5486been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5487evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5488the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5489value in that section.
5490@smallexample
5491@group
5492SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5493 .output @{
5494 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5495 @dots{}
5496 @}
5497@dots{} @}
5498@end group
5499@end smallexample
5500
252b5132
RH
5501@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5502@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5503This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5504scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5505section.
5506
2d20f7bf
JJ
5507@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5508@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5509This is equivalent to either
5510@smallexample
5511(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5512@end smallexample
5513or
5514@smallexample
5515(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5516@end smallexample
5517@noindent
5518depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5519for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5520@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5521If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5522memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5523bytes in the on-disk file.
5524
5525This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5526any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5527@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5528be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5529working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5530
5531@noindent
5532Example:
5533@smallexample
5534 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5535@end smallexample
5536
5537@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5538@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5539This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5540evaluation purposes.
5541
5542@smallexample
5543 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5544@end smallexample
5545
a4f5ad88
JJ
5546@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5547@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5548This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5549@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5550When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5551does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5552@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5553boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5554it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5555@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5556
5557@smallexample
5558 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5559@end smallexample
5560
252b5132
RH
5561@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5562@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5563@cindex symbol defaults
5564Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5565defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5566return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5567default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5568shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5569the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5570existed, its value is preserved:
5571
5572@smallexample
5573@group
5574SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5575 .text : @{
5576 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5577 @dots{}
5578 @}
5579 @dots{}
5580@}
5581@end group
5582@end smallexample
5583
3ec57632
NC
5584@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5585@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5586Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5587
252b5132
RH
5588@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5589@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5590@cindex section load address in expression
5591Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. This is normally
5592the same as @code{ADDR}, but it may be different if the @code{AT}
5593attribute is used in the output section definition (@pxref{Output
5594Section LMA}).
5595
5596@kindex MAX
5597@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5598Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5599
5600@kindex MIN
5601@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5602Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5603
5604@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5605@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5606@cindex unallocated address, next
5607Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5608This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5609use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5610output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5611
3ec57632
NC
5612@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5613@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5614Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5615
ba916c8a
MM
5616@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5617@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5618Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5619value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5620option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5621@var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5622be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
5623``bss'' sections, but you use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
5624name.
5625
252b5132
RH
5626@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5627@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5628@cindex section size
5629Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5630been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5631evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5632@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5633@smallexample
5634@group
5635SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5636 .output @{
5637 .start = . ;
5638 @dots{}
5639 .end = . ;
5640 @}
5641 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5642 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5643@dots{} @}
5644@end group
5645@end smallexample
5646
5647@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5648@itemx sizeof_headers
5649@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5650@cindex header size
5651Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5652information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5653this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5654choose, to facilitate paging.
5655
5656@cindex not enough room for program headers
5657@cindex program headers, not enough room
5658When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5659@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5660number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5661addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5662additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5663room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5664the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5665script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5666you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5667command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5668@end table
5669
5670@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5671@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5672@cindex implicit linker scripts
5673If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5674an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5675linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5676linker will report an error.
5677
5678An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5679
5680Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5681assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5682commands.
5683
5684Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5685at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5686read. This can affect archive searching.
5687
5688@ifset GENERIC
5689@node Machine Dependent
5690@chapter Machine Dependent Features
5691
5692@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
5693@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5694sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
5695functionality are not listed.
5696
5697@menu
36f63dca
NC
5698@ifset H8300
5699* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5700@end ifset
5701@ifset I960
5702* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5703@end ifset
5704@ifset ARM
5705* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5706@end ifset
5707@ifset HPPA
5708* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5709@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
5710@ifset M68K
5711* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5712@end ifset
3c3bdf30 5713@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 5714* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 5715@end ifset
2469cfa2 5716@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 5717* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 5718@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
5719@ifset M68HC11
5720* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5721@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
5722@ifset POWERPC
5723* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5724@end ifset
5725@ifset POWERPC64
5726* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5727@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
5728@ifset SPU
5729* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5730@end ifset
74459f0e 5731@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 5732* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 5733@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
5734@ifset WIN32
5735* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5736@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
5737@ifset XTENSA
5738* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
5739@end ifset
252b5132
RH
5740@end menu
5741@end ifset
5742
252b5132
RH
5743@ifset H8300
5744@ifclear GENERIC
5745@raisesections
5746@end ifclear
5747
5748@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 5749@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
5750
5751@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 5752For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
5753you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5754
5755@table @emph
5756@cindex relaxing on H8/300
5757@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 5758@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
5759targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5760program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5761respectively.
5762
5763@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
5764@item synthesizing instructions
5765@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
ff5dcc92 5766@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
5767sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5768page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
5769(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
5770@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
5771top page of memory).
1502569c
NC
5772
5773@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 5774@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 5775biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 5776which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
5777page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
5778(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 5779@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
5780the top page of memory).
5781
5782@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
5783@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
578432 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
5785changes them to use 16 bit address form.
5786(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 5787@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 5788the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
5789@end table
5790
5791@ifclear GENERIC
5792@lowersections
5793@end ifclear
5794@end ifset
5795
36f63dca 5796@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 5797@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 5798@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
5799@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
5800@node Renesas
5801@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 5802
c2dcd04e
NC
5803@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
5804H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
5805options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
5806@end ifset
5807@end ifclear
5808
5809@ifset I960
5810@ifclear GENERIC
5811@raisesections
5812@end ifclear
5813
5814@node i960
5815@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
5816
5817@cindex i960 support
5818
5819You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
5820specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
5821family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
5822incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
5823linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
5824libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
5825search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
5826
5827For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
5828well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
5829paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
5830the names
5831
5832@smallexample
5833@group
5834try
5835libtry.a
5836tryca
5837libtryca.a
5838@end group
5839@end smallexample
5840
5841@noindent
5842The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
5843two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
5844
5845You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
5846the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
5847use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
5848specifies a library.
5849
5850@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
5851@cindex relaxing on i960
5852@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
5853you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
5854@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
5855them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
5856instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
5857instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
5858target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
5859not itself call any subroutines).
5860
5861@ifclear GENERIC
5862@lowersections
5863@end ifclear
5864@end ifset
5865
5866@ifset ARM
5867@ifclear GENERIC
5868@raisesections
5869@end ifclear
5870
93fd0973
SC
5871@ifset M68HC11
5872@ifclear GENERIC
5873@raisesections
5874@end ifclear
5875
5876@node M68HC11/68HC12
5877@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5878
5879@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
5880
5881@subsection Linker Relaxation
5882
5883For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
5884optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5885
5886@table @emph
5887@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
5888@item relaxing address modes
5889@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
5890targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5891program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5892respectively.
5893
5894@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
5895transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
5896page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
5897
5898@item relaxing gcc instruction group
5899When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
5900of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
5901addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
5902@code{bset} instructions.
5903
5904@end table
5905
5906@subsection Trampoline Generation
5907
5908@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
5909@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
5910For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
5911call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 5912will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
5913trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
5914case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
5915point to the function trampoline.
5916
5917@ifclear GENERIC
5918@lowersections
5919@end ifclear
5920@end ifset
5921
36f63dca 5922@node ARM
3674e28a 5923@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
5924
5925@cindex ARM interworking support
5926@kindex --support-old-code
5927For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 5928between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
5929been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
5930line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
5931libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
5932option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
5933given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
5934which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
5935the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
5936non-interworking aware Thumb code.
5937
5938@cindex thumb entry point
5939@cindex entry point, thumb
5940@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
5941The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
5942@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
5943But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
5944branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
5945executing in Thumb mode straight away.
5946
ce11ba6c
KT
5947@cindex PE import table prefixing
5948@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
5949The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
5950the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
5951elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
5952import tables. By default this option is turned off.
5953
e489d0ae
PB
5954@cindex BE8
5955@kindex --be8
5956The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
5957executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
5958The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
5959
3674e28a
PB
5960@cindex TARGET1
5961@kindex --target1-rel
5962@kindex --target1-abs
5963The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
5964@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
5965or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
5966and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
5967
5968@cindex TARGET2
5969@kindex --target2=@var{type}
5970The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
5971@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
5972meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
5973@table @samp
5974@item rel
eeac373a
PB
5975@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
5976@item abs
5977@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
5978@item got-rel
5979@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
5980@end table
5981
319850b4
JB
5982@cindex FIX_V4BX
5983@kindex --fix-v4bx
5984The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
5985specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
5986interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
5987also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
5988
5989In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
5990linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
5991@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
5992
5993In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
5994relocations are ignored.
5995
845b51d6
PB
5996@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
5997@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
5998Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
5999relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6000
6001@smallexample
6002TST rM, #1
6003MOVEQ PC, rM
6004BX Rn
6005@end smallexample
6006
6007This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6008and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6009condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
6010
33bfe774
JB
6011@cindex USE_BLX
6012@kindex --use-blx
6013The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6014BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6015situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6016code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6017each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6018
6019This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6020specify it if you are using that target.
6021
c6dd86c6
JB
6022@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6023@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6024The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6025bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6026instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6027to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6028the support code can read the intended values.
6029
6030The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6031intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6032and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6033intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6034full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6035you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6036
6037If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6038enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6039@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6040mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6041vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6042@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6043
6044If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6045potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6046such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6047first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6048instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6049the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6050are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6051
bf21ed78
MS
6052@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6053@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6054The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6055warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6056enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6057linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6058using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6059not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6060
6061@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6062@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6063The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6064warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6065@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6066linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6067using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6068
726150b7
NC
6069@cindex PIC_VENEER
6070@kindex --pic-veneer
6071The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6072ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6073is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6074@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6075
6076@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6077@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6078The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6079code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6080perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6081placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6082controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6083The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6084duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
6085group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6086code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6087where they should be placed.
6088
6089The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6090@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6091placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6092branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6093placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6094value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6095exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6096A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6097linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6098from the input sections.
6099
6100The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6101@samp{N = +1}.
6102
1a51c1a4
NC
6103Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6104only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6105otherwise.
6106
36f63dca
NC
6107@ifclear GENERIC
6108@lowersections
6109@end ifclear
6110@end ifset
6111
6112@ifset HPPA
6113@ifclear GENERIC
6114@raisesections
6115@end ifclear
6116
6117@node HPPA ELF32
6118@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6119@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6120@kindex --multi-subspace
6121When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6122import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6123The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6124stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6125multiple sub-spaces.
6126
6127@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6128@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6129Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6130stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6131@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6132sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6133a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6134the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6135conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6136prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6137A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6138branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6139@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6140@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6141detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6142positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6143
6144Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6145single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6146create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6147large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6148
6149@ifclear GENERIC
6150@lowersections
6151@end ifclear
6152@end ifset
6153
7fb9f789
NC
6154@ifset M68K
6155@ifclear GENERIC
6156@raisesections
6157@end ifclear
6158
6159@node M68K
6160@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6161
6162@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6163@kindex --got=@var{type}
6164The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6165The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6166@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6167the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6168@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6169entries only at non-negative offsets.
6170@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6171entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6172support such GOTs.
6173@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6174output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6175file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6176files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6177
6178@ifclear GENERIC
6179@lowersections
6180@end ifclear
6181@end ifset
6182
36f63dca
NC
6183@ifset MMIX
6184@ifclear GENERIC
6185@raisesections
6186@end ifclear
6187
6188@node MMIX
6189@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6190For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6191@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6192understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6193can translate between the two formats.
6194
6195There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6196Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6197registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6198equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6199@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6200global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6201this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6202symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6203
7a2de473
HPN
6204Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6205@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6206The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6207of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6208
6209Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6210are left out from an mmo file.
6211
6212@ifclear GENERIC
6213@lowersections
6214@end ifclear
6215@end ifset
6216
6217@ifset MSP430
6218@ifclear GENERIC
6219@raisesections
6220@end ifclear
6221
6222@node MSP430
6223@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6224For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6225will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6226just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6227
6228@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6229The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6230
6231@table @code
6232@item @samp{.vectors}
6233Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6234
6235@item @samp{.bootloader}
6236Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6237in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6238
6239@item @samp{.infomem}
6240Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6241this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6242
c0065db7 6243@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6244This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6245in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6246
6247@item @samp{.noinit}
6248Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6249
c0065db7 6250The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6251@end table
6252
6253@ifclear GENERIC
6254@lowersections
6255@end ifclear
6256@end ifset
6257
2a60a7a8
AM
6258@ifset POWERPC
6259@ifclear GENERIC
6260@raisesections
6261@end ifclear
6262
6263@node PowerPC ELF32
6264@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6265@cindex PowerPC long branches
6266@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6267Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6268displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6269@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6270@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6271the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6272section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
6273section exceeds 33M in size.
6274
6275@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6276@table @option
6277@cindex PowerPC PLT
6278@kindex --bss-plt
6279@item --bss-plt
6280Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6281generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6282the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6283writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6284@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6285PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6286compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6287BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6288
016687f8
AM
6289@kindex --secure-plt
6290@item --secure-plt
6291@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6292@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6293when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6294layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6295style BSS PLT.
6296
2a60a7a8
AM
6297@cindex PowerPC GOT
6298@kindex --sdata-got
6299@item --sdata-got
6300The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6301sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6302@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6303section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6304@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6305@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6306@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6307@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6308PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6309pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6310GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6311really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6312
6313@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6314@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6315@item --emit-stub-syms
6316This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6317symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6318
6319@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6320@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6321@item --no-tls-optimize
6322PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6323sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6324disable the optimization.
6325@end table
6326
6327@ifclear GENERIC
6328@lowersections
6329@end ifclear
6330@end ifset
6331
6332@ifset POWERPC64
6333@ifclear GENERIC
6334@raisesections
6335@end ifclear
6336
6337@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6338@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6339
6340@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6341@table @option
6342@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6343@kindex --stub-group-size
6344@item --stub-group-size
6345Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6346by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6347@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6348sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6349a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6350the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6351conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6352prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6353A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6354branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6355@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6356@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6357detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6358positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6359
6360Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6361single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6362create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6363large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6364
6365@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6366@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6367@item --emit-stub-syms
6368This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6369symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6370
6371@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6372@kindex --dotsyms
6373@kindex --no-dotsyms
6374@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6375These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6376in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6377function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6378code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6379properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6380to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6381@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6382dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6383feature.
6384
6385@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6386@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6387@item --no-tls-optimize
6388PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6389sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6390disable the optimization.
6391
6392@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6393@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6394@item --no-opd-optimize
6395PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6396corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6397the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6398Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6399
6400@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6401@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6402@item --non-overlapping-opd
6403Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6404@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6405the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6406entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6407
6408@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6409@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6410@item --no-toc-optimize
6411PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6412entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6413reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6414marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6415marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6416relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6417unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6418reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6419discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6420reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6421code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6422optimization.
6423
6424@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6425@kindex --no-multi-toc
6426@item --no-multi-toc
6427By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
6428entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6429total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6430grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6431TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6432calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6433help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
643464K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6435Use this option to turn off this feature.
6436@end table
6437
6438@ifclear GENERIC
6439@lowersections
6440@end ifclear
6441@end ifset
6442
49fa1e15
AM
6443@ifset SPU
6444@ifclear GENERIC
6445@raisesections
6446@end ifclear
6447
6448@node SPU ELF
6449@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6450
6451@cindex SPU ELF options
6452@table @option
6453
6454@cindex SPU plugins
6455@kindex --plugin
6456@item --plugin
6457This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6458
6459@cindex SPU overlays
6460@kindex --no-overlays
6461@item --no-overlays
6462Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6463regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6464@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6465turns off all this special overlay handling.
6466
6467@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6468@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6469@item --emit-stub-syms
6470This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6471symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6472
6473@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6474@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6475@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6476This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6477function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6478on calls to non-overlay regions.
6479
6480@cindex SPU local store size
6481@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6482@item --local-store=lo:hi
6483@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6484the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6485range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6486
c0065db7 6487@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6488@kindex --stack-analysis
6489@item --stack-analysis
6490SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6491unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6492under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6493@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6494@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6495determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6496for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6497for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6498for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6499find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6500and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6501under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6502dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6503is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6504and calls will be given.
6505
c0065db7 6506@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6507@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6508@item --emit-stack-syms
6509This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6510in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6511These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6512functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6513functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6514such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6515The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6516@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6517@end table
6518
6519@ifclear GENERIC
6520@lowersections
6521@end ifclear
6522@end ifset
6523
36f63dca
NC
6524@ifset TICOFF
6525@ifclear GENERIC
6526@raisesections
6527@end ifclear
6528
6529@node TI COFF
6530@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6531@cindex TI COFF versions
6532@kindex --format=@var{version}
6533The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6534TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6535also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6536format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6537header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6538
6539@ifclear GENERIC
6540@lowersections
6541@end ifclear
6542@end ifset
6543
2ca22b03
NC
6544@ifset WIN32
6545@ifclear GENERIC
6546@raisesections
6547@end ifclear
6548
6549@node WIN32
6550@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6551
c0065db7 6552This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 6553See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 6554command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
6555
6556@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6557@cindex import libraries
6558@item import libraries
69da35b5 6559The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 6560libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
6561regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6562archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
6563support for creating such libraries provided with the
6564@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6565
c0065db7
RM
6566@item exporting DLL symbols
6567@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
6568The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6569
6570@table @emph
6571@item using auto-export functionality
6572@cindex using auto-export functionality
6573By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6574which is controlled by the following command line options:
6575
0a5d968e
NC
6576@itemize
6577@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6578@item --exclude-symbols
6579@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 6580@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
0a5d968e
NC
6581@end itemize
6582
c0065db7 6583If, however, @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
6584command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6585if either of the following are true:
6586
6587@itemize
6588@item A DEF file is used.
6589@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6590@end itemize
dc8465bf 6591
c0065db7
RM
6592@item using a DEF file
6593@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
6594Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6595an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6596exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6597name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 6598command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
6599
6600@example
6601gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6602@end example
6603
0a5d968e
NC
6604Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6605@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6606
dc8465bf
NC
6607Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6608
6609@example
4b5bd4e7 6610LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
6611
6612EXPORTS
6613foo
6614bar
6615_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
6616another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6617var1 DATA
c0065db7 6618@end example
dc8465bf 6619
4b5bd4e7
DS
6620This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and five
6621symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6622alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6623by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6624@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
6625@code{var1} is declared to be a data object.
6626
6b31ad16
DS
6627The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6628name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6629the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6630
b45619c0
NC
6631When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6632library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 6633@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 6634executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
6635
6636With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6637specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 6638non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
6639
6640If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
6641or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6642filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 6643
4b5bd4e7
DS
6644The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6645
6646@example
6647EXPORTS
6648 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
6649 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
6650 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] ) *
c0065db7 6651@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
6652
6653Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
6654@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
6655@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
6656@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
6657Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
6658@samp{<integer>} alias.
6659
6660The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
6661
6662@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
6663will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
6664by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
6665linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
6666library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
6667
6668@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
6669The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
6670the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
6671@code{*_imp__foo}).
6672
6673@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
6674well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
6675read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
6676variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
6677the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
6678extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
6679application will behave unexpectedly.
6680
6681@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
6682it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
6683symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
6684API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
6685the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 6686
4b5bd4e7
DS
6687See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
6688other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
6689
6690@cindex creating a DEF file
6691While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
6692with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
6693
6694@item Using decorations
6695@cindex Using decorations
6696Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
6697itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
6698declared as:
6699
6700@example
6701__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
6702__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
6703@end example
6704
6705All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
6706any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
6707this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
6708the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6709
6710Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 6711decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
6712instead:
6713
6714@example
6715__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
6716__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
6717@end example
6718
c0065db7
RM
6719This complicates the structure of library header files, because
6720when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
6721variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
6722code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 6723of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
6724omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
6725@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 6726information.
c0065db7 6727@end table
dc8465bf 6728
2ca22b03
NC
6729@cindex automatic data imports
6730@item automatic data imports
6731The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 6732by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 6733compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 6734issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 6735code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 6736c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 6737initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 6738decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 6739platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
6740command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
6741The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
6742suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
6743trigger the feature's use.
6744
c0065db7 6745auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
6746additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
6747
c0065db7 6748"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
6749documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
6750
c0065db7
RM
6751The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
6752occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
6753One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
6754below.
6755
6756@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
6757For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
6758object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
6759offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
6760field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
6761in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 6762without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 6763The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
6764references.
6765
c0065db7
RM
6766The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
6767be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
6768themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
6769runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
6770compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
6771support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
6772run without error on an older system.
6773
c0065db7
RM
6774@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
6775enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
6776
6777@cindex direct linking to a dll
6778@item direct linking to a dll
6779The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
6780including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 6781libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 6782traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
6783libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
6784function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
6785though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 6786storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 6787tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
6788large or complex libraries when using import libs.
6789
c0065db7 6790Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 6791@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 6792of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
6793perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
6794select the dll instead of an import library.
6795
2ca22b03 6796
69da35b5
NC
6797For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
6798to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
6799
6800@example
45e948fe
NC
6801libxxx.dll.a
6802xxx.dll.a
6803libxxx.a
6804xxx.lib
69da35b5 6805cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
6806libxxx.dll
6807xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
6808@end example
6809
69da35b5
NC
6810before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
6811
c0065db7
RM
6812(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
6813where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
6814@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
6815file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
6816@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
6817
c0065db7
RM
6818Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
6819@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
6820was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
6821various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
6822could coexist on the same machine.
6823
2ca22b03
NC
6824The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
6825applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 6826libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
6827
6828@example
6829bin/
6830 cygxxx.dll
6831lib/
6832 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 6833 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
6834@end example
6835
c0065db7
RM
6836Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
6837done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
6838
68391. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
6840@example
6841gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 6842@end example
2ca22b03 6843
69da35b5
NC
6844However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
6845(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
6846@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
6847not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
6848
2ca22b03
NC
68492. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
6850directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
6851should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
6852making the app/dll.
6853
6854@example
6855ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 6856@end example
2ca22b03
NC
6857
6858Then you can link without any make environment changes.
6859
6860@example
6861gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 6862@end example
69da35b5
NC
6863
6864This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
6865perfectly legal
6866
6867@example
6868bin/
6869 cygxxx-5.dll
6870lib/
c0065db7 6871 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
6872@end example
6873
dc8465bf 6874Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
6875even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
6876@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
6877
6878Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 6879wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
6880
68811. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
6882work with auto-imported data.
6883
dc8465bf
NC
68842. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
6885import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
6886symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
6887for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
6888possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 6889
45e948fe
NC
68903. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
6891critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
6892in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
6893stdcall-decorated assembly names.
6894
69da35b5 6895So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
6896true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
6897a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
6898binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
6899massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
6900requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
6901will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 6902
c0065db7 6903@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 6904@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6905@item adding additional names
6906Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
6907A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
6908exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
6909when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 6910import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 6911
c0065db7 6912@example
dc8465bf
NC
6913LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6914
6915EXPORTS
c0065db7 6916foo
dc8465bf 6917_foo = foo
c0065db7 6918@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6919
6920The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
6921
6922Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
6923source code using the "weak" attribute:
6924
c0065db7
RM
6925@example
6926void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 6927void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 6928@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6929
6930See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
6931symbols.
6932
6933@item renaming symbols
6934Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 6935kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
6936@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
6937DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 6938created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 6939
c0065db7 6940@example
dc8465bf
NC
6941LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6942
6943EXPORTS
6944_foo = foo
c0065db7 6945@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6946
6947The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
6948@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 6949@end table
dc8465bf 6950
0a5d968e 6951Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 6952unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 6953If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
6954@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
6955that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
6956@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
6957renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
6958to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
6959the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
6960In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 6961which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
6962
6963@cindex weak externals
6964@item weak externals
6965The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
6966weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
6967defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
6968are three variants of weak externals:
6969@itemize
6970@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
6971called lazy externals.
6972@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
6973This form is not presently implemented.
6974@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
6975implemented.
6976@end itemize
6977As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
6978are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
6979uses a default value.
2ca22b03
NC
6980@end table
6981
6982@ifclear GENERIC
6983@lowersections
6984@end ifclear
6985@end ifset
6986
e0001a05
NC
6987@ifset XTENSA
6988@ifclear GENERIC
6989@raisesections
6990@end ifclear
6991
6992@node Xtensa
6993@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6994
6995@cindex Xtensa processors
6996The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
6997@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
6998specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
6999keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7000example, with the command:
7001
7002@smallexample
7003SECTIONS
7004@{
7005 .text : @{
7006 *(.literal .text)
7007 @}
7008@}
7009@end smallexample
7010
7011@noindent
7012@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7013and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7014literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7015interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7016group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7017files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7018and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7019
43cd72b9 7020@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7021@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7022Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7023provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7024is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7025literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7026will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7027location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7028the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7029unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7030@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7031range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7032
7033For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7034to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7035instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7036instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7037instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7038@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7039hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7040By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7041switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7042density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7043instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7044performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7045linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7046a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7047
7048The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7049control the linker:
7050
7051@cindex Xtensa options
7052@table @option
e0001a05 7053@kindex --no-relax
43cd72b9
BW
7054@item --no-relax
7055Since the Xtensa version of @code{ld} enables the @option{--relax} option
7056by default, the @option{--no-relax} option is provided to disable
7057relaxation.
7058
7059@item --size-opt
7060When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7061more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7062no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7063alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7064preserve the correctness of the code.
7065@end table
e0001a05
NC
7066
7067@ifclear GENERIC
7068@lowersections
7069@end ifclear
7070@end ifset
7071
252b5132
RH
7072@ifclear SingleFormat
7073@node BFD
7074@chapter BFD
7075
7076@cindex back end
7077@cindex object file management
7078@cindex object formats available
7079@kindex objdump -i
7080The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7081These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7082object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7083format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7084it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7085associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7086object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7087(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7088list all the formats available for your configuration.
7089
7090@cindex BFD requirements
7091@cindex requirements for BFD
7092As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7093several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7094BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7095formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7096been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7097BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7098may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7099
7100One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7101mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7102useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7103conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7104
7105@menu
7106* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7107@end menu
7108
7109@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7110@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7111@cindex opening object files
7112@include bfdsumm.texi
7113@end ifclear
7114
7115@node Reporting Bugs
7116@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7117@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7118@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7119
ff5dcc92 7120Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7121
7122Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7123it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7124to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7125work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7126@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7127
7128In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7129information that enables us to fix the bug.
7130
7131@menu
7132* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7133* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7134@end menu
7135
7136@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7137@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7138@cindex bug criteria
7139
7140If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7141
7142@itemize @bullet
7143@cindex fatal signal
7144@cindex linker crash
7145@cindex crash of linker
7146@item
7147If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7148@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7149
7150@cindex error on valid input
7151@item
ff5dcc92 7152If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7153
7154@cindex invalid input
7155@item
ff5dcc92 7156If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7157may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7158object files are correct.
7159
7160@item
7161If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7162improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7163@end itemize
7164
7165@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7166@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7167@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7168@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7169
7170A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7171products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7172recommend you contact that organization first.
7173
7174You can find contact information for many support companies and
7175individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7176distribution.
7177
ad22bfe8 7178@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7179Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7180@value{BUGURL}.
7181@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7182
7183The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7184@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7185fact or leave it out, state it!
7186
7187Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7188problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7189assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7190matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7191the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7192location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7193were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7194into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7195specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7196and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7197
7198Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7199the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7200on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7201
7202Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7203bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7204respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7205You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7206
7207To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7208
7209@itemize @bullet
7210@item
ff5dcc92 7211The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7212the @samp{--version} argument.
7213
7214Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7215the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7216
7217@item
ff5dcc92 7218Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7219patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7220
7221@item
7222The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7223version number.
7224
7225@item
ff5dcc92 7226What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7227``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7228
7229@item
7230The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7231observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7232list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7233sufficient.
7234
7235If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7236and then we might not encounter the bug.
7237
7238@item
7239A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7240bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7241provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7242bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7243state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7244requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7245we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7246attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7247
7248If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7249@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7250object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7251@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7252how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7253
7254@item
7255A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7256incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7257
ff5dcc92 7258Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7259will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7260not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7261a chance to make a mistake.
7262
7263Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7264say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7265copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7266C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7267and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7268fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7269you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7270any conclusion from our observations.
7271
7272@item
ff5dcc92 7273If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7274diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7275@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7276If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7277context, not by line number.
7278
7279The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7280sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7281@end itemize
7282
7283Here are some things that are not necessary:
7284
7285@itemize @bullet
7286@item
7287A description of the envelope of the bug.
7288
7289Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7290which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7291changes will not affect it.
7292
7293This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7294will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7295with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7296We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7297
7298Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7299of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7300output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7301less time, and so on.
7302
7303However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7304report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7305
7306@item
7307A patch for the bug.
7308
7309A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7310the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7311a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7312to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7313
ff5dcc92 7314Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7315construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7316through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7317able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7318fixed.
7319
7320And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7321patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7322help us to understand.
7323
7324@item
7325A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7326
7327Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7328things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7329@end itemize
7330
7331@node MRI
7332@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7333@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7334To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7335linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7336alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7337described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7338simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7339@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7340linker commands; these commands are described here.
7341
7342In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7343file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7344features to make use of them.
7345
7346You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7347@samp{-c} command-line option.
7348
7349Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7350command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7351blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7352MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7353issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7354
7355Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7356
7357You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7358lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7359The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7360
7361@table @code
7362@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7363@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7364@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7365Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7366the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7367@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7368your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7369script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7370commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7371input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7372@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7373
7374@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7375@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7376Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7377in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7378
7379@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7380
7381@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7382@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7383Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7384@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7385
7386@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7387@item BASE @var{expression}
7388Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7389absolute addresses) in the output file.
7390
7391@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7392@item CHIP @var{expression}
7393@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7394This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7395
7396@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7397@item END
7398This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7399
7400@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7401@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7402Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7403language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7404
7405@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7406@item
252b5132
RH
7407S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7408
7409@item
7410IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7411
7412@item
7413COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7414@samp{COFF}
7415@end enumerate
7416
7417@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7418@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7419Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7420@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7421
7422The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7423same line, with no change in its effect.
7424
7425@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7426@item LOAD @var{filename}
7427@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7428Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7429same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7430command line.
7431
7432@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7433@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7434@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7435MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7436option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7437
7438@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7439@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7440@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7441Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7442order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7443script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7444sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7445file, in the order specified.
7446
7447@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7448@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7449@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7450@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7451Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7452@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7453
7454@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7455@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7456@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7457@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7458You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7459specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7460If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7461@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7462@end table
7463
793c5807
NC
7464@node GNU Free Documentation License
7465@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 7466@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7467
370b66a1
CD
7468@node LD Index
7469@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7470
7471@printindex cp
7472
7473@tex
7474% I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7475% meantime:
7476\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7477\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7478\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7479\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7480\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7481\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7482\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7483\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7484\page\colophon
7485% Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7486@end tex
7487
252b5132 7488@bye
This page took 1.275864 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.